Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Administrator's Guide

Size: px
Start display at page:

Download "Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Administrator's Guide"

Transcription

1 Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Administrator's Guide Windows, Linux, and UNIX Release Publication release , revision 1

2 The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Documentation version: , revision 1 Legal Notice Copyright 2009 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved. Symantec, the Symantec Logo, and PureDisk are trademarks or registered trademarks of Symantec Corporation or its affiliates in the U.S. and other countries. Other names may be trademarks of their respective owners. This Symantec product may contain third party software for which Symantec is required to provide attribution to the third party ( Third Party Programs ). Some of the Third Party Programs are available under open source or free software licenses. The License Agreement accompanying the Software does not alter any rights or obligations you may have under those open source or free software licenses. Please see the Third Party Legal Notice Appendix to this Documentation or TPIP ReadMe File accompanying this Symantec product for more information on the Third Party Programs. The product described in this document is distributed under licenses restricting its use, copying, distribution, and decompilation/reverse engineering. No part of this document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Symantec Corporation and its licensors, if any. THE DOCUMENTATION IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND ALL EXPRESS OR IMPLIED CONDITIONS, REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON-INFRINGEMENT, ARE DISCLAIMED, EXCEPT TO THE EXTENT THAT SUCH DISCLAIMERS ARE HELD TO BE LEGALLY INVALID. SYMANTEC CORPORATION SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH THE FURNISHING, PERFORMANCE, OR USE OF THIS DOCUMENTATION. THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENTATION IS SUBJECT TO CHANGE WITHOUT NOTICE. The Licensed Software and Documentation are deemed to be commercial computer software as defined in FAR and subject to restricted rights as defined in FAR Section "Commercial Computer Software - Restricted Rights" and DFARS , "Rights in Commercial Computer Software or Commercial Computer Software Documentation", as applicable, and any successor regulations. Any use, modification, reproduction release, performance, display or disclosure of the Licensed Software and Documentation by the U.S. Government shall be solely in accordance with the terms of this Agreement.

3 Symantec Corporation 350 Ellis Street Mountain View, CA

4 Technical Support Symantec Technical Support maintains support centers globally. Technical Support s primary role is to respond to specific queries about product features and functionality. The Technical Support group also creates content for our online Knowledge Base. The Technical Support group works collaboratively with the other functional areas within Symantec to answer your questions in a timely fashion. For example, the Technical Support group works with Product Engineering and Symantec Security Response to provide alerting services and virus definition updates. Symantec s maintenance offerings include the following: A range of support options that give you the flexibility to select the right amount of service for any size organization Telephone and Web-based support that provides rapid response and up-to-the-minute information Upgrade assurance that delivers automatic software upgrade protection Global support that is available 24 hours a day, 7 days a week Advanced features, including Account Management Services For information about Symantec s Maintenance Programs, you can visit our Web site at the following URL: Contacting Technical Support Customers with a current maintenance agreement may access Technical Support information at the following URL: Before contacting Technical Support, make sure you have satisfied the system requirements that are listed in your product documentation. Also, you should be at the computer on which the problem occurred, in case it is necessary to replicate the problem. When you contact Technical Support, please have the following information available: Product release level Hardware information Available memory, disk space, and NIC information Operating system

5 Version and patch level Network topology Licensing and registration Customer service Router, gateway, and IP address information Problem description: Error messages and log files Troubleshooting that was performed before contacting Symantec Recent software configuration changes and network changes If your Symantec product requires registration or a license key, access our technical support Web page at the following URL: Customer service information is available at the following URL: Customer Service is available to assist with the following types of issues: Questions regarding product licensing or serialization Product registration updates, such as address or name changes General product information (features, language availability, local dealers) Latest information about product updates and upgrades Information about upgrade assurance and maintenance contracts Information about the Symantec Buying Programs Advice about Symantec's technical support options Nontechnical presales questions Issues that are related to CD-ROMs or manuals

6 Maintenance agreement resources If you want to contact Symantec regarding an existing maintenance agreement, please contact the maintenance agreement administration team for your region as follows: Asia-Pacific and Japan Europe, Middle-East, and Africa North America and Latin America Additional enterprise services Symantec offers a comprehensive set of services that allow you to maximize your investment in Symantec products and to develop your knowledge, expertise, and global insight, which enable you to manage your business risks proactively. Enterprise services that are available include the following: Symantec Early Warning Solutions Managed Security Services Consulting Services Educational Services These solutions provide early warning of cyber attacks, comprehensive threat analysis, and countermeasures to prevent attacks before they occur. These services remove the burden of managing and monitoring security devices and events, ensuring rapid response to real threats. Symantec Consulting Services provide on-site technical expertise from Symantec and its trusted partners. Symantec Consulting Services offer a variety of prepackaged and customizable options that include assessment, design, implementation, monitoring, and management capabilities. Each is focused on establishing and maintaining the integrity and availability of your IT resources. Educational Services provide a full array of technical training, security education, security certification, and awareness communication programs. To access more information about Enterprise services, please visit our Web site at the following URL: Select your country or language from the site index.

7 Contents Technical Support... 4 Chapter 1 External directory service authentication About external directory service authentication Assumptions User accounts Obtaining directory service information Example Active Directory service Example OpenLDAP directory service (Optional) Adding PureDisk groups to your directory service (Optional) Verify TLS and copy the CA certificate Verifying the server name Writing the certificate to the storage pool authority Linking PureDisk to the external directory service Configuring communication Managing user groups Enabling the PureDisk system policy that synchronizes PureDisk with an external directory service Completing the General tab Completing the Scheduling tab About maintaining synchronization between PureDisk and an external directory service Adding, changing, or deleting users or groups Changing the youruserclass, yourloginattrib, or yournameattrib variables in your directory service s ldap.xml file Changing the yourdescriptionattrib variable or the yourmailattrib variable in your directory service s ldap.xml file Disabling external authentication Changing the TLS specification Modifying the base search path Chapter 2 Single-port communication About single port communication Configuring single-port communication Configuring your domain name server (DNS) and firewall... 51

8 8 Contents Adding FQDNs to each service Creating a new department with single-port settings Specifying port number 443 as the default port in the configuration file template (Conditional) Configuring port 443 in replication policies Installing agent software on the clients or moving clients Chapter 3 Data replication About data replication About data replication and PureDisk release levels About data replication policies Creating or editing a data replication policy Completing the General tab for a Replication policy Completing the Data Selections tab for a Replication policy Completing the Scheduling tab for a Replication policy Completing the Parameters tab for a Replication policy Replication jobs Copying and deleting a replication policy Managing replicated data selections Viewing replicated data Working with replicated agents and data selections Copying replicated data to clients on the destination storage pool Restoring replicated data back to clients on the source storage pool Restoring replicated Oracle data Tuning replication Chapter 4 Exporting data to NetBackup About exporting data to NetBackup Export limitations Requirements for exporting data to NetBackup Requirements for restoring data from NetBackup Enabling and using the NetBackup export engine Configuring PureDisk and NetBackup for export capability Configuring NetBackup to receive data exported from PureDisk Configuring PureDisk to export data to NetBackup Creating or editing an export to NetBackup policy Completing the General tab for an Export to NetBackup policy... 87

9 Contents 9 Completing the Data Selections tab for an Export to NetBackup policy Completing the Scheduling tab for an Export to NetBackup policy Completing the Parameters tab for an Export to NetBackup policy (Optional) Completing the Metadata tab for an Export to NetBackup policy Running an export to NetBackup policy Performing a point-in-time export to NetBackup Troubleshooting export job failures NetBackup export engine log files Problems with inactive server agents Copying or deleting an export to NetBackup policy Restoring from NetBackup Restoring to a PureDisk client that is not a NetBackup client Restoring to a PureDisk client that is also a NetBackup client Chapter 5 Disaster recovery backup procedures About disaster recovery backup procedures About performing disaster recovery backups About backing up your PureDisk environment using NetBackup Prerequisites for NetBackup disaster recovery backups Configuring the NetBackup client software Enabling NetBackup for PureDisk backups About NetBackup policy names Configuring PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies Completing the General tab for a disaster recovery backup policy Completing the Scheduling tab for a disaster recovery backup policy Completing the Parameters tab for a disaster recovery backup policy About backing up your PureDisk environment using scripts Prerequisites for script-based disaster recovery backups PureDisk s disaster recovery backup or restore script examples Creating a backup script Troubleshooting a disaster recovery backup Missing pdkeyutil file Content router modes set incorrectly

10 10 Contents Chapter 6 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools About restoring an unclustered PureDisk environment When to restore your environment Restore overview for an unclustered storage pool Reinstalling required software (unclustered recovery) Reinstalling PDOS (Conditional) Reconfiguring the storage partitions on DAS/SAN disks (Conditional) Reconfiguring the storage partitions on iscsi disks Completing the software reinstallation Performing a disaster recovery of an unclustered PureDisk storage pool from a NetBackup disaster recovery backup (NetBackup, unclustered recovery) (Conditional) Cleaning up after a failed full disaster recovery backup (NetBackup, unclustered recovery) Using the DR_Restore_all script (NetBackup, unclustered recovery) Performing a disaster recovery from a Samba backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) (Conditional) Recreate your topology information (Samba, unclustered recovery) (Conditional) Removing corrupted files from an incomplete backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) (Conditional) Preparing the storage pool authority node for disaster recovery (Samba, unclustered recovery) Using the DR_Restore_all script (Samba, unclustered recovery) Performing a disaster recovery from a third-party product backup (third-party, unclustered recovery) (Conditional) Recreate your topology information (third-party, unclustered recovery) (Conditional) Removing corrupted files from an incomplete full disaster recovery backup (third-party, unclustered recovery) (Conditional) Preparing the storage pool authority node for disaster recovery (third-party, unclustered recovery) Using the DR_Restore_all script (third-party, unclustered recovery)

11 Contents 11 Chapter 7 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools About restoring a clustered PureDisk environment Recovering from a single-node failover Recovering one active node Reinstalling the PDOS software and the VCS software Recreating disks and volumes Running the DR_Restore_all script Recovering from a data storage corruption Recreate the storage partitions that failed Recreating disks and volumes Running the DR_Restore_all script Recovering from a complete storage pool disaster (clustered, complete storage pool disaster) Reinstalling PDOS and disabling the service groups Recreating disks and volumes Running the DR_Restore_all script (Conditional) Cleaning up after a failed full disaster recovery backup Cleaning up after a failed full NetBackup disaster recovery backup (clustered, complete storage pool disaster) Cleaning up after a failed full Samba disaster recovery backup (clustered, complete storage pool disaster) Cleaning up after a failed full third-party product disaster recovery backup (clustered, complete storage pool disaster) (Conditional) Recreate your topology information (Conditional) Recreating the topology with current topology information (Samba or third-party, clustered recovery) (Conditional) Recreating the topology without current topology information (Samba or third-party, clustered recovery) Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data Recovering a PureDisk clustered storage pool from a NetBackup disaster recovery backup Recovering a PureDisk clustered storage pool from a Samba disaster recovery backup Recovering a PureDisk clustered storage pool from a third-party product disaster recovery backup Chapter 8 Storage pool authority replication (SPAR) About storage pool authority replication (SPAR) Disaster recovery strategies Activating the local storage pool

12 12 Contents Enabling SPAR backups Completing the General tab for a SPA Replication Completing the Scheduling tab for a SPA Replication policy Completing the Parameters tab for a SPA Replication policy Running a SPAR policy manually Restoring from a SPAR backup About the RestoreSPASIO command Upgrading PureDisk with SPAR enabled Chapter 9 Reports About reports Permissions and guidelines for running and viewing reports Reports for a running job Examining a running job Restarting a backup job About policies and workflows Types of workflows Workflows in policies Obtaining detailed job reports General tab for a Job Details report Details tab for a Job Details report Statistics tab for a Job Details report Files tab for a Job Details report Errors tab for a Job Details report Job log tab for a Job Details report About Data mining reports Enabling a data mining policy Completing the General tab for a data mining policy Completing the Scheduling tab for a data mining policy Completing the Parameters tab for a data mining policy Running a data mining policy manually Obtaining data mining policy output - the data mining report Interpreting the storage pool data reduction factor Effect of compression on data reduction Effects of segmentation on data reduction Obtaining data mining policy output - the Web service report Web service reports Job status Web service reports Dashboard Web service reports Importing report output into a spreadsheet About Dashboard reports

13 Contents 13 Displaying the Capacity dashboard Displaying the Activity dashboard Displaying the Server agent dashboard Displaying the Client agent dashboard Central storage pool authority reports Displaying the Central Reporting dashboard Updating the Central Reporting dashboard Chapter 10 Log files and auditing About the log file directory Content router log files Metabase engine log file Workflow engine log file Server agent log files About international characters in log files Audit trail reporting Setting debugging mode Enabling debugging mode Disabling debugging mode Removing temporary debugging files Chapter 11 Storage pool management About storage pool management About adding services Adding a service to a node Adding a new service on an existing node Adding a new node and at least one new service on the new node Verifying and specifying content router capacity Adding a new passive node to a cluster Activating a new service in the storage pool Rerouting a content router and managing content routers Planning for a new content router Permissions for rerouting Disaster recovery backups and rerouting Data replication policies and rerouting Activating and deactivating content routers Alleviating content router congestion Parallel and serial rerouting examples Rerouting the content routers Troubleshooting a content router rerouting job Deactivating a service

14 14 Contents Preparing to deactivate a content router Deactivating a content router or NetBackup export engine Managing license keys About central reporting Enabling a storage pool as a central storage pool Adding a remote storage pool to a central storage pool Disabling central reporting Managing storage pools configured in the central storage pool Rerouting a metabase engine (Optional) Gathering metabase engine capacity information Preparing clients for rerouting Preparing the old metabase engine for rerouting Adding the new metabase engine and recording its address Rerouting the agents on the metabase engine Restarting the agent Verifying a metabase engine rerouting Troubleshooting About clustered storage pool administration Changing the PDOS administrator s password Changing the PureDisk internal database and the LDAP administrator passwords Increasing the number of client connections Adjusting the clock on a PureDisk node Adjusting the Web UI time-out interval Stopping and starting processes on one PureDisk node (unclustered) Stopping all services Starting all services Starting all services without rebooting Stopping and starting individual services Stopping and starting processes on one PureDisk node (clustered) Stopping and starting processes in a multinode PureDisk storage pool Restarting the Java run-time environment Chapter 12 Reconfiguring your PureDisk environment About the configuration files Examining configuration settings Editing the configuration files with the Web UI

15 Contents 15 Making a copy of a value set Navigating to a value in the configuration file copy Changing a configuration file value or deleting a configuration file value Assigning the template and, optionally, pushing the configuration file changes Editing the configuration files with a text editor Updating the agent configuration files on a client Chapter 13 Tuning and optimization Tuning backup and restore performance Editing an agent configuration file to improve backup and restore performance Editing an agent configuration file to accommodate large backups Multistreamed (parallel) backups Multistreamed (parallel) restores Segmentation options for backup jobs Unexpected results Tuning replication performance Appendix A Installing the clustering software About the Veritas Cluster Server (VCS) software installation (Conditional) Examining the NICs for the private heartbeats Examining the NICs in this node for addressing (Conditional) Removing addressing from the private heartbeat NICs Synchronizing passwords Generating the authentication key on each node Collect the SSH public keys Distributing the key file (Optional) Verifying the SSH access Installing the Veritas Cluster Server (VCS) software Installing VCS 4.1 MP Installing VCS 4.1 MP4 and VCS 4.1 MP4RP Configuring VCS (Conditional) Using YaST to create the storage partitions Starting YaST Creating the storage partitions Appendix B Command Line Interface options for PureDisk

16 16 Contents Appendix C Third-party legal notices Third-party legal notices for Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Index

17 Chapter 1 External directory service authentication This chapter includes the following topics: About external directory service authentication Obtaining directory service information (Optional) Adding PureDisk groups to your directory service (Optional) Verify TLS and copy the CA certificate Linking PureDisk to the external directory service Enabling the PureDisk system policy that synchronizes PureDisk with an external directory service About maintaining synchronization between PureDisk and an external directory service Adding, changing, or deleting users or groups Changing the youruserclass, yourloginattrib, or yournameattrib variables in your directory service s ldap.xml file Changing the yourdescriptionattrib variable or the yourmailattrib variable in your directory service s ldap.xml file Disabling external authentication Changing the TLS specification Modifying the base search path

18 18 External directory service authentication About external directory service authentication About external directory service authentication By default, PureDisk authenticates users through its internal OpenLDAP directory service. If you want to use only PureDisk s internal OpenLDAP directory service for user authentication, you do not need to perform any additional configuration. Alternatively, you can configure your site s external OpenLDAP or Active Directory service for user authentication. PureDisk requires the following levels: OpenLDAP, version Active Directory, Microsoft Server 2008, Service Pack 1 Active Directory, Microsoft Server 2003, Service Pack 1 Active Directory, Microsoft Server 2000, Service Pack 4 The following process explains the tasks you need to complete to configure external directory service authentication. To configure external directory service configuration 1 Obtain directory service information. See Obtaining directory service information on page (Optional) Add PureDisk groups to your directory service. See (Optional) Adding PureDisk groups to your directory service on page (Optional) Verify transport layer security (TLS) and copy the certificate authority s certificate. See (Optional) Verify TLS and copy the CA certificate on page Link PureDisk to the external directory service. See Linking PureDisk to the external directory service on page Enable the PureDisk policy that synchronizes PureDisk with the directory service. See Enabling the PureDisk system policy that synchronizes PureDisk with an external directory service on page 40. Assumptions The procedures you need to perform to configure external authentication assume that you are familiar with how your site s OpenLDAP or Active Directory service is organized. The procedures also assume that your site s directory service administrator can provide you with information about how the directory service is configured.

19 External directory service authentication Obtaining directory service information 19 User accounts The following information pertains to user accounts when external authentication is enabled: The EditLDAPServerConfiguration screen in the Web UI includes a checkbox labeled Enable LDAP Authentication. When this box is checked, PureDisk authenticates through an external directory service. When this box is unchecked, PureDisk authenticates through its internal OpenLDAP directory service. You cannot merge these directory services. PureDisk can use either its internal directory service or your external directory service, but it cannot use both at the same time. When PureDisk is configured to authenticate through its internal directory service, only its local user accounts are valid. However, when PureDisk is configured to use an external directory service, only the accounts from that external directory service are valid. If the external service is down, you can authenticate from PureDisk s internal OpenLDAP service. For example, the external directory service may be down. If you try to synchronize the external directory service, the job that runs the system policy for syncing external ldap users fails. If you want to add PureDisk users and groups, add them in your directory service and import them into PureDisk. When authentication through an external directory service is enabled, you cannot create users and groups directly in PureDisk. After you import users and groups from the external directory service, you need to grant PureDisk permissions to those users and groups. You cannot import a user with the root login property from an external directory service. The root users for both PureDisk and for the external directory service are always present and are always unique. By default, the PureDisk root user s permissions and privileges are always the same. They remain the same regardless of whether authentication is through PureDisk s internal directory service or through an external directory service. Obtaining directory service information Your site s directory service administrator can help you gather the information that you need to configure PureDisk to perform external user authentication. This administrator can also help you analyze your site s existing authentication configuration. The following procedure explains the information that you need to obtain from your site s directory service administrator.

20 20 External directory service authentication Obtaining directory service information To obtain information about your site s directory service 1 Obtain general information from your site s external directory service administrator. The following table summarizes the information that you need to obtain. You can use the right column of the table to make notes about the requirements. Item needed Directory service host fully qualified domain name (FQDN) (preferred), host name, or IP address. Port number to the server that hosts the directory service Site-speecific value The ldapsearch(1) command and its parameters that PureDisk needs to obtain a listing. Copy of the certificate authority file. The directory service administrator needs to put a copy of this file on the storage pool authority. Common name of the certificate authority file. 2 (Conditional) Obtain TLS information from your site s external directory service administrator. Perform this step if your site requires TLS. If your site has an Active Directory service, you need to convert the certificate file you receive to PEM format. Instructions later in this process explain when and how to perform the conversion. 3 Examine a listing from your directory service. Each OpenLDAP or Active Directory service is unique. The directory services themselves, their structures, and their schemas are site-specific and unique to their purpose. For this reason, you must examine the object classes and attributes in your directory service and map them to the PureDisk configuration information screens. The following examples show directory service listings: See Example Active Directory service on page 21.

21 External directory service authentication Obtaining directory service information 21 See Example OpenLDAP directory service on page Save your directory listing. You need to use this listing later in the configuration process. 5 Proceed to one of the following topics: If you want to add PureDisk user groups to your directory service at this time, proceed to the following topic: See (Optional) Adding PureDisk groups to your directory service on page 28. If TLS is required at your site, proceed to the following topic: See (Optional) Verify TLS and copy the CA certificate on page 29. Otherwise, proceed to the following topic: See Linking PureDisk to the external directory service on page 33. Example Active Directory service Table 1-1 shows the structure of an example Active Directory service. Table 1-1 Active Directory service structure Domain controller Domain controller Organization units Common names dc=com dc=acme ou=users cn=alice Munro cn=bob Cratchit cn=claire Clairmont cn=dave Bowman ou=groups cn=chicago cn=atlanta This directory service has two organizational units: users and groups. You can use the ldapsearch(1) command to obtain a listing of this directory service. The command to obtain a listing of users and groups is as follows:

22 22 External directory service authentication Obtaining directory service information # ldapsearch -H ldap:// :389 -x \ -D "cn=alice Munro,ou=users,dc=acme,dc=com" -W \ -b dc=acme,dc=com "(objectclass=*)" > /tmp/example.txt # extended LDIF # # LDAPv3 If more directory entries exist in the same directory subtree, a command such as the preceding example returns information about more than users and groups. The command writes its output to file example.txt. In the example file that follows, characters in bold represent definitions from this file that you need later in the configuration process: # base <dc=acme,dc=com> with scope subtree # base search path # filter: (objectclass=*) # requesting: ALL # # Alice Munro, users, acme.com dn: CN=Alice Munro,OU=users,DC=acme,DC=com objectclass: top objectclass: person objectclass: organizationalperson objectclass: user objectclass: inetorgperson cn: Alice Munro sn: Munro description: Alice's Description givenname: Alice distinguishedname: CN=Alice Munro,OU=users,DC=acme,DC=com displayname: Alice memberof: CN=chicago,OU=groups,DC=acme,DC=com usnchanged: name: Alice Munro samaccountname: alice.munro userprincipalname: alice.munro@acme.com mail: alice.munro@acme.com # youruserclass # yournameattrib # yourdescriptionattrib # yourloginattrib # yourmailattrib # Bob Cratchit, users, acme.com dn: CN=Bob Cratchit,OU=users,DC=acme,DC=com objectclass: top objectclass: person objectclass: organizationalperson

23 External directory service authentication Obtaining directory service information 23 objectclass: user objectclass: inetorgperson cn: Bob Cratchit sn: Cratchit description: Bob's Description givenname: Bob distinguishedname: CN=Bob Cratchit,OU=users,DC=acme,DC=com displayname: Bob Cratchit memberof: CN=chicago,OU=groups,DC=acme,DC=com name: Bob Cratchit samaccountname: bob.cratchit userprincipalname: mail: # Claire Clairmont, users, acme.com dn: CN=Claire Clairmont,OU=users,DC=acme,DC=com objectclass: top objectclass: person objectclass: organizationalperson objectclass: user objectclass: inetorgperson cn: Claire Clairmont sn: Clairmont description: Claire's Description givenname: Claire distinguishedname: CN=Claire Clairmont,OU=users,DC=acme,DC=com displayname: Claire Clairmont memberof: CN=atlanta,OU=groups,DC=acme,DC=com name: Claire Clairmont samaccountname: claire.clairmont userprincipalname: mail: # Dave Bowman, users, acme.com dn: CN=Dave Bowman,OU=users,DC=acme,DC=com objectclass: top objectclass: person objectclass: organizationalperson objectclass: user objectclass: inetorgperson cn: Dave Bowman sn: Bowman description: Dave's Description

24 24 External directory service authentication Obtaining directory service information givenname: Dave distinguishedname: CN=Dave Bowman,OU=users,DC=acme,DC=com displayname: Dave Bowman memberof: CN=atlanta,OU=groups,DC=acme,DC=com name: Dave Bowman samaccountname: dave.bowman userprincipalname: mail: # chicago, groups, acme.com dn: CN=chicago,OU=groups,DC=acme,DC=com objectclass: top objectclass: group samaccountname: chicago member: CN=Bob Cratchit,OU=users,DC=acme,DC=com member: CN=Alice Munro,OU=users,DC=acme,DC=com distinguishedname: CN=chicago,OU=groups,DC=acme,DC=com name: chicago samaccountname: chicago # yourusergroupclass # yournameattrib # yourmemberattrib # atlanta, groups, acme.com dn: CN=atlanta,OU=groups,DC=acme,DC=com objectclass: top objectclass: group samaccountname: atlanta member: CN=Dave Bowman,OU=users,DC=acme,DC=com member: CN=Claire Clairmont,OU=users,DC=acme,DC=com distinguishedname: CN=atlanta,OU=groups,DC=acme,DC=com name: atlanta samaccountname: atlanta # search result search: 7 result: 0 Success # numresponses: 7 # numentries: 6 Example OpenLDAP directory service Table 1-2 shows the structure of an example OpenLDAP directory service.

25 External directory service authentication Obtaining directory service information 25 Table 1-2 OpenLDAP directory service structure Domain controller Domain controller Organizational units Common names dc=com dc=marlins ou=commuters cn=florence Leeds cn=mary Evans cn=diana Goyer cn=adam Smith cn=eric Meyer cn=joe McKinley ou=groups cn=bikers cn=drivers This directory service has two organizational units: commuters and groups. You can use the ldapsearch(1) command to obtain a listing of this directory service. The command to obtain a listing of the users and groups is as follows: # ldapsearch -H ldap:// :389/ -x \ -D "cn=diana Goyer,ou=commuters,dc=marlins,dc=com" -W \ -b "dc=marlins,dc=com" "(objectclass=*)">/tmp/example.txt # extended LDIF # # LDAPv3 This example writes its output to file example.txt. In the example that follows, characters in bold represent the definitions that you need later in the configuration process. The external directory service authentication configuration procedures use examples from this listing. File example.txt is as follows: # base <dc=marlins,dc=com> with scope subtree # base search path # filter: (objectclass=*)

26 26 External directory service authentication Obtaining directory service information # requesting: ALL # # marlins.com dn: dc=marlins,dc=com dc: marlins objectclass: domain # commuters, marlins.com dn: ou=commuters,dc=marlins,dc=com ou: commuters objectclass: organizationalunit # groups, marlins.com dn: ou=groups,dc=marlins,dc=com ou: groups objectclass: organizationalunit # Florence Leeds, commuters, marlins.com dn: cn=florence Leeds,ou=commuters,dc=marlins,dc=com mail: Florence.Leeds@marlins.com uid: fleeds objectclass: inetorgperson sn: Leeds cn: Florence Leeds userpassword:: cgfzc3dvcmq= # yourmailattrib # yourloginattrib # youruserclass # yournameattrib # Mary Evans, commuters, marlins.com dn: cn=mary Evans,ou=commuters,dc=marlins,dc=com mail: Mary.Evans@marlins.com uid: mevans objectclass: inetorgperson sn: Evans cn: Mary Evans userpassword:: cgfzc3dvcmq= # Diana Goyer, commuters, marlins.com dn: cn=diana Goyer,ou=commuters,dc=marlins,dc=com mail: Diana.Goyer@marlins.com uid: dgoyer objectclass: inetorgperson sn: Goyer cn: Diana Goyer

27 External directory service authentication Obtaining directory service information 27 userpassword:: cgfzc3dvcmq= # Adam Smith, commuters, marlins.com dn: cn=adam Smith,ou=commuters,dc=marlins,dc=com mail: Adam.Smith@marlins.com uid: asmith objectclass: inetorgperson sn: Smith cn: Adam Smith userpassword:: cgfzc3dvcmq= # Eric Meyer, commuters, marlins.com dn: cn=eric Meyer,ou=commuters,dc=marlins,dc=com mail: Eric.Meyer@marlins.com uid: emeyer objectclass: inetorgperson sn: Meyer cn: Eric Meyer userpassword:: cgfzc3dvcmq= # Joe McKinley, commuters, marlins.com dn: cn=joe McKinley,ou=commuters,dc=marlins,dc=com mail: Joe.McKinley@marlins.com uid: jmckinley objectclass: inetorgperson sn: McKinley cn: Joe McKinley userpassword:: cgfzc3dvcmq= # bikers, groups, marlins.com dn: cn=bikers,ou=groups,dc=marlins,dc=com objectclass: groupofnames cn: bikers member: cn=florence Leeds,ou=commuters,dc=marlins,dc=com member: cn=mary Evans,ou=commuters,dc=marlins,dc=com member: cn=diana Goyer,ou=commuters,dc=marlins,dc=com # yourusergroupclass # yournameattrib # yourmemberattrib # drivers, groups, marlins.com dn: cn=drivers,ou=groups,dc=marlins,dc=com objectclass: groupofnames cn: drivers member: cn=adam Smith,ou=commuters,dc=marlins,dc=com member: cn=eric Meyer,ou=commuters,dc=marlins,dc=com

28 28 External directory service authentication (Optional) Adding PureDisk groups to your directory service member: cn=joe McKinley,ou=commuters,dc=marlins,dc=com # search result search: 2 result: 0 Success # numresponses: 12 # numentries: 11 (Optional) Adding PureDisk groups to your directory service Perform this procedure if you want to create PureDisk user groups at this time. You can perform this procedure either now or after you complete the external directory service authentication configuration. In this procedure, you create users and groups that are specific to PureDisk operations. You can configure PureDisk to authenticate some or all of the user groups that are defined in your directory service. After you add, delete, or change user or group information in your directory service, run the PureDisk system policy. This policy synchronizes external directory service users with PureDisk s internal directory service. You can run the synchronization policy at any time after your initial configuration. If you configure users and groups specific to PureDisk now, you can see them in the Web UI immediately after you complete the configuration. To create PureDisk users and groups 1 Edit your directory service and add one or more of the following typical PureDisk user groups: Administrators. Users with full administrative privileges. Users. Users who can back up and restore data. Reporters. Users who can run reports. Installers. Users who can install PureDisk agents on client systems. Backup operators. Users who can back up files for one storage pool but cannot restore or delete. The following manual includes information about the different types of permissions that you can grant to users and user groups: See the PureDisk Client Installation Guide. 2 Proceed to one of the following topics: If TLS is required at your site, proceed to the following topic:

29 External directory service authentication (Optional) Verify TLS and copy the CA certificate 29 See (Optional) Verify TLS and copy the CA certificate on page 29. Otherwise, proceed to the following topic: See Linking PureDisk to the external directory service on page 33. (Optional) Verify TLS and copy the CA certificate You can use TLS during the user authentication process, but PureDisk does not require TLS. If TLS is required, perform the following procedures. The directory service needs to authenticate to the storage pool authority. PureDisk does not support mutual authentication for situations in which the Active Directory server and the storage pool authority need to authenticate to each other. To verify TLS and copy the CA certificate 1 Verify the server name. Verifying the server name See Verifying the server name on page Write the certificate to the storage pool authority. See Writing the certificate to the storage pool authority on page Proceed to the following topic: See Linking PureDisk to the external directory service on page 33. The following procedure explains how to verify the server name in the TLS certificate. When you use TLS, specify the common name whenever a procedure requires you to provide the LDAP Server Host Name. Unresolvable common names are the most common cause of server certificate errors. To verify the server name in the certificate 1 Obtain the certificate s common name from your directory service administrator. 2 Log into the storage pool authority node (unclustered) or storage pool authority service (clustered) as root.

30 30 External directory service authentication (Optional) Verify TLS and copy the CA certificate # ping mn.north.stars 3 Verify the common name by issuing a ping(8) command against the certificate s common name. For example: PING mn.north.stars ( ) 56(84) bytes of data. 64 bytes from mn.north.stars ( ): icmp_seq=1 ttl=64 time=4.71 ms 64 bytes from mn.north.stars ( ): icmp_seq=2 ttl=64 time=0.353 ms 4 (Conditional) Edit the /etc/hosts file. Perform this step only if the previous step s ping(8) command was unsuccessful. Add a line in the following format to the end of the /etc/hosts file: ip_addr_of_external_directory_services common_name For example, if the common name of your directory service certificate is mn.north.stars, the line should look like the following: mn.north.stars 5 Proceed to the following: See Writing the certificate to the storage pool authority on page 30. Writing the certificate to the storage pool authority The following procedure explains how to write the certificate to the storage pool authority node and verify the server-side authentication. To write the certificate to the storage pool authority 1 Log into the storage pool authority node (unclustered) or storage pool authority service (clustered) as root. 2 Copy one of the following certificate files to the appropriate directory on the storage pool authority: The cacert.pem file from an OpenLDAP server. cacert.pem is the default name for this file when it is generated by an OpenLDAP server. This file name can be different at your site. The generated certificate from an Active Directory server. The appropriate directory for the certificate file is as follows:

31 External directory service authentication (Optional) Verify TLS and copy the CA certificate 31 In an unclustered storage pool, Symantec recommends that you write the certificate file to the /var/ldap/certstore/ directory, but you can write this file to any directory. In a clustered storage pool, Symantec recommends that you log into the storage pool authority and write the certificate file to /Storage/var/keys. When you write the certificate file to /Storage, you ensure that the certificate moves with the storage pool authority when a failover occurs. You can use any file transfer program to copy the files. 3 (Conditional) Use the openssl(1) command and the x509(1) utility to convert the Active Directory certificate to PEM format. Perform this step only if an Active Directory service generated the certificate. You do not have to perform this step if an OpenLDAP directory service generated the certificate. The openssl(1) command and the x509(1) utility make the file compatible with OpenSSL. Type the following command: # /usr/bin/openssl x509 -inform DER -outform PEM -in file.cer -out file.pem This command s variables are as follows: file.cer file.pem The name of the file that contains the Active Directory certificate. This file name ends in.cer. Obtain this file from your site s directory service administrator. The name of your certificate in the format that is compatible with OpenSSL. This file ends in.pem. 4 Use the openssl(1) command and the s_client(1) program to test the port connections and to verify that the SSL certificate operates correctly. Type the following command: # /usr/bin/openssl s_client -connect FQDN:port -showcerts -state -CAfile cert_loc This command s variables are as follows:

32 32 External directory service authentication (Optional) Verify TLS and copy the CA certificate FQDN: port The directory service server s FQDN and the port from which you imported the certificate. This variable takes the format FQDN:port. Specify the following values: For FQDN, specify the FQDN of the directory service server. For port, specify the port that the directory service server uses for incoming communication. By default, the value is 636. For example blink.acme.com:636. cert_loc Specify the absolute path to the certificate file. This file is the one that you copied in step step 2. For example: /var/ldap/certstore/mycertfile.pem.

33 External directory service authentication Linking PureDisk to the external directory service 33 5 Use the ldapsearch(1) command to test the connection between the storage pool authority and the directory service server. The connection needs to be open to allow continued authentication activities. Type the command as follows: This command has the following format: # /usr/bin/ldapsearch -H ldaps://ds_serv:port -x -D "uid" -W -b base "(filter)" For example: # /usr/bin/ldapsearch -H ldaps:// :636 -x \ -D "cn=alice Munro,ou=users,dc=acme,dc=com" -W \ -b ou=groups,dc=acme,dc=com "(objectclass=group)" The command s variables are as follows: ds_serv port uid base filter The FQDN, host name, or IP address of the directory service server. Symantec recommends that you specify an FQDN. The port the PureDisk uses for TLS communication. This port is the one where the external OpenLDAP server runs ldaps. By default, the value is 636. The distinguished name of the test user with which to bind. The base search path. An object class name. The command searches for this object class name as a test. If the connection is open, it displays a listing of directory service server information. If the command fails or generates messages, fix the connectivity problems before you proceed. 6 Proceed to the following topic: See Linking PureDisk to the external directory service on page 33. Linking PureDisk to the external directory service Use the following procedures to link PureDisk and your external Active Directory or OpenLDAP directory service.

34 34 External directory service authentication Linking PureDisk to the external directory service To link PureDisk to the external directory service 1 Configure communication in the PureDisk Web UI. See Configuring communication on page Manage user groups. Configuring communication See Managing user groups on page 39. The following procedure explains how to configure communication in the PureDisk Web UI. To configure communication in the PureDisk Web UI 1 Display the storage pool authority opening screen. Open a browser window and type the following URL: For URL, specify the URL to the storage pool authority. For example, in an all-in-one environment, this value is the URL of the PureDisk node upon which you installed all the PureDisk software. For example, 2 Type your user name and password at the prompts on the login screen. 3 Click Settings > Configuration. 4 In the left pane, click the plus (+) sign to the left of LDAP server. 5 Select External LDAP. The LDAP Server Configuration properties appear in the right pane. 6 Complete the Connection tab. See Completing the Connection tab on page Complete the Mapping tab. See Completing the Mapping tab on page Enable user group management. See Managing user groups on page 39. Completing the Connection tab The following procedure explains how to complete the fields on the Connection tab.

35 External directory service authentication Linking PureDisk to the external directory service 35 To complete the Connection tab 1 (Optional) Check the Enable LDAP Authentication box. Perform this step if you want to enable an external OpenLDAP service or an external Active Directory service. A check in this box determines whether PureDisk uses the default PureDisk OpenLDAP directory service or whether PureDisk uses an external directory service, as follows: If you want to enable PureDisk's internal OpenLDAP directory service, clear this box. By default, this box is clear. For example, if the external directory service goes down, clear this box. When this box is clear, PureDisk uses its internal authentication mechanism, and users can continue to use PureDisk while the external directory service is down. If you want to enable an external OpenLDAP service or an external Active Directory service, check this box. 2 Specify the LDAP Server Host Name. The content of this field differs depending on whether or not you enabled transport layer security (TLS), as follows: When TLS is enable, specify the FQDN of the external OpenLDAP server. Note that this FQDN must match the common name that you specified when you created the certificate of your external OpenLDAP server. If you do not have this information yet, obtain this name from your directory service administrator. When TLS is not enabled, specify the FQDN or IP address of the server upon which your external OpenLDAP or Active Directory service resides. If you want to enable single port communication between the nodes and clients in your PureDisk environment, Symantec recommends that you use an FQDN for this field. For example: blinkie.acme.com. 3 Verify, and respecify if needed, the Port number that connects PureDisk to the external OpenLDAP or Active Directory service. The port to specify depends on whether TLS is enabled, as follows: When TLS is enabled, the default security port is 636. When TLS is not enabled, the default port is Check or clear the Enable TLS for LDAP Communication box. A check in this box determines whether TLS is enabled. TLS encrypts data transactions between your external directory service and PureDisk.

36 36 External directory service authentication Linking PureDisk to the external directory service 5 (Conditional) Specify the CA Certificate Location. Perform this step if you checked Enable TLS for LDAP Communication. Specify the full path to the file that contains the certificate authority that PureDisk can use to verify the connection to the external directory service server. This is the file you copied over from the external directory service server to the storage pool authority, and typically, this file resides in /var/ldap/certstore/. Specify the location you configured in the following procedure: See (Optional) Verify TLS and copy the CA certificate on page 29. This file must reside on the storage pool authority in PEM format. 6 Specify the User Distinguished Name. The distinguished name of an external directory service administrator account. This administrator account does not need to have full privileges on the directory service server. PureDisk requires only the search privilege. Contact your site s directory service administrator to obtain this value. 7 In the Password field, specify the password for the UserDistinguishedName's account. Contact your site's directory service administrator to obtain this password. 8 In the Service Type pull-down menu, select either Active Directory or OpenLDAP. 9 Specify the external directory service's Base Search Path. This path specifies a directory in the external directory service beneath which PureDisk beneath which PureDisk can find the entries that define all user groups. Type the distinguished name into this field. Specify the highest entry that is a common ancestor of the groups that you need. Note that it is in a later procedure that you specify the individual groups that define the users that you want to authenticate as PureDisk users. This later procedure is as follows: See To manage user groups on page 40. For example, assume that you want PureDisk to use the groups from the OpenLDAP marlins.com directory service. To specify all groups, examine the ldapsearch(1) command output and complete the following steps: Type the following into the box under the Base Search path label: dc=marlins,dc=com Click Add.

37 External directory service authentication Linking PureDisk to the external directory service 37 You can specify only one search path. 10 Proceed to the following: See Completing the Mapping tab on page 37. Completing the Mapping tab The following procedure explains how to complete the fields on the Mapping tab. The examples in this procedure refer to the values in examples.txt described in the following: See Example OpenLDAP directory service on page 24. To complete the Mapping tab 1 Click the Mapping tab. 2 Gather the directory service listing that you obtained when you completed the following procedure: See Obtaining directory service information on page 19. If you have not yet obtained a listing, generate one now. Keep this output available to you. You might need the information in the listing to complete the Mapping tab. For example, for a small configuration, obtain a copy of the ldapsearch(1) output. For a large configuration, you can use a directory browser such as the one at the following location: The Symantec Corporation does not endorse, guarantee, or recommend any particular LDAP browser.

38 38 External directory service authentication Linking PureDisk to the external directory service 3 Complete the fields under the User attributes heading. The following table explains how to complete these fields. User object class Specify the attribute that defines the object class for users on your external directory service. Active Directory example: user. OpenLDAP example: inetorgperson. Login attribute Specify the attribute that uniquely identifies a user. The user ID for each user is unique. Active Directory example: samaccountname. OPenLDAP example: uid. Name attribute Specify the attribute that defines a user's real name. The is the login ID of a user. Active Directory example: cn. OpenLDAP example: cn. Description attribute (Optional) Specify the attribute for the descriptive field. Some directory services do not have this attribute. Active Directory example: description. OpenLDAP example: description. address attribute (Optional) Specify the attribute that describes the user's address. Active Directory example: mail. OpenLDAP example: mail.

39 External directory service authentication Linking PureDisk to the external directory service 39 4 Complete the fields under the Group attributes heading. The following table explains how to complete these fields. Group object class Specify the attribute that defines the object class for groups on your external directory service. Active Directory example: group. OpenLDAP example: groupofnames. Membership attribute Specify the attribute that defines each member in the group. Active Directory example: member. OpenLDAP example: member. Name attribute Specify the attribute that defines a user group. Active Directory example: samaccountname. OpenLDAP example: cn. 5 Click Save. Managing user groups 6 (Conditional) On the storage pool authority, edit the /etc/hosts file and add a line that allows the storage pool authority service to resolve the directory server using the name of this certificate. Perform this step if you enabled TLS. For example, assume that the common name of the certificate file is blinkie.acme.com. Note that this string is not the FQDN of the server upon which the directory resides. Add the following entry: blinkie.acme.com 7 Proceed to the following: See Managing user groups on page 39. The following procedure explains how to manage user groups.

40 40 External directory service authentication Enabling the PureDisk system policy that synchronizes PureDisk with an external directory service To manage user groups 1 Click Settings > Configuration. 2 In the left pane, click the plus (+) sign to the left of LDAP Server. 3 Select External LDAP. 4 In the right pane, click Manage User Groups. 5 Complete the Manage User Groups pane. In this screen, complete the following steps: In the left-most box, under the Distinguished Name label, type the distinguished name of a user group into this field. For example: CN=atlanta,OU=groups,DC=acme,DC=com or cn=bikers,ou=groups,dc=marlins,dc=com. Click Add. Repeat the preceding steps to add distinguished names for all the user groups that PureDisk needs to authenticate. Click Save. If the external directory service is down at the time you click Save, PureDisk generates the following message: Error: Invalid Search Path 6 Proceed to the following: See Enabling the PureDisk system policy that synchronizes PureDisk with an external directory service on page 40. Enabling the PureDisk system policy that synchronizes PureDisk with an external directory service PureDisk lets you create several different policies for backups, data removal, and many other purposes. However, for other tasks you only need one generic policy. PureDisk includes several system policies for these generic tasks. In most cases, you need to enable a system policy before PureDisk can run the policy. The procedure in this topic describes how to enable the system policy that can synchronize the directory services. This synchronization ensures that PureDisk recognizes the users and the groups that you add to the external directory service.

41 External directory service authentication Enabling the PureDisk system policy that synchronizes PureDisk with an external directory service 41 During the synchronization, PureDisk does not synchronize user passwords. The passwords reside only in the external directory service files. The PureDisk Web UI does not accept empty, bank passwords. Make sure that all users you want to authenticate through an external directory service have a nonblank password. A user with a blank password cannot log into the PureDisk Web UI. To enable the system policy for synchronization 1 Click Manage > Policies. 2 In the left pane, under Miscellaneous Workflows, click the plus sign (+) next to External LDAP server synchronization. 3 Select System policy for Syncing external LDAP users. 4 Complete the General tab. Note: The General tab and the Scheduling tab include a Save option on each tab. Do not click Save until you complete the fields on each tab. If you click Save before you complete each tab, it saves the specifications you made up to that point and closes the dialog box. To complete more fields, open the dialog again in edit mode. See Completing the General tab on page Complete the Scheduling tab. Completing the General tab See Completing the Scheduling tab on page 42. This tab specifies the general characteristics for this policy. To complete the General tab 1 (Optional) Type a new name for this policy in the Name field. You do not need to rename this policy. The default name is System policy for Syncing external LDAP users. 2 Select Enabled or Disabled. This setting lets you control whether or not PureDisk runs the policy according to the schedule you specify in the Scheduling tab. If you select Enabled, PureDisk runs the policy according to the schedule. If you select Disabled, PureDisk does not run the policy according to the schedule. Disabled is the default.

42 42 External directory service authentication About maintaining synchronization between PureDisk and an external directory service For example, you might want to stop running this policy during a system maintenance period. If you select Disabled, you do not need to enter information in the Scheduling tab to suspend and then re-enable this policy. 3 Specify an escalation action. PureDisk can notify you if replication does not complete within a specified time. For example, you can configure PureDisk to send an message to an individual if a replication policy workflow does not complete in an hour. Select times in the Escalatewarningafter or the Escalateerrorandterminate after drop-down boxes to specify the elapsed time. If the policy workflow does not complete before the warning timeout, PureDisk generates a warning event. If the policy workflow does not complete before the error timeout, PureDisk generates an error event. If you select either option, you must create a policy and an event escalation action. These escalation actions define the message, define its recipients, and associate the escalation action with the policy. For information about policy and event escalations, see the following manual: See the PureDisk Backup Operator s Guide. 4 Proceed to the following: Completing the Scheduling tab See Completing the Scheduling tab on page 42. From this tab, use the drop-down lists and check boxes to specify when the policy is to run. To specify the schedule 1 Accept the system defaults or use the drop-down lists to specify when the policy is to run. 2 Click Save. About maintaining synchronization between PureDisk and an external directory service Over time you can change users or groups in your external directory service. As users and groups change, run the system policy that synchronizes the external directory service with PureDisk. For information about this policy, see the following:

43 External directory service authentication Adding, changing, or deleting users or groups 43 See Enabling the PureDisk system policy that synchronizes PureDisk with an external directory service on page 40. The following topics describe other changes you might need to make to your authentication configuration: See Adding, changing, or deleting users or groups on page 43. See Changing the youruserclass, yourloginattrib, or yournameattrib variables in your directory service s ldap.xml file on page 44. Adding, changing, or deleting users or groups If you need to add, change, or delete users and groups in your external directory service, use the procedures that your directory service provides. After you make the changes, however, ensure that you edit the appropriate group information in the PureDisk Web UI. Then run the system policy for synchronizing external directory service users. For example, assume that you remove a user group from an Active Directory service and fail to remove that group s distinguished name. PureDisk can generate messages such as the following in the job log file for the synchronization job: Start to load group cn=redfox,cn=users,dc=gerardtest,dc=local from EXTERNAL LDAP *** Error Message *** 0 severity: 6 server: source: SPA-CLI_Component description: [2]ldap_read(): Search: No such object *** End *** You can use the same procedure to add or delete user groups. The procedure is as follows: See Managing user groups on page 39.

44 44 External directory service authentication Changing the youruserclass, yourloginattrib, or yournameattrib variables in your directory service s ldap.xml file Changing the youruserclass, yourloginattrib, or yournameattrib variables in your directory service s ldap.xml file If you change the youruserclass, yourloginattrib, or yournameattrib variables in your directory service, you need to update PureDisk s /etc/puredisk/ldap.xml file. To change the youruserclass, yourloginattrib, or yournameattrib variables 1 Use your directory service s methods to change the object class names in your directory service source files. 2 Log into the storage pool authority node as root. 3 Edit file /etc/puredisk/ldap.xml to reflect the changes that you made to your directory service. 4 Log into the PureDisk Web UI. 5 Click Manage > Policies. 6 Under Miscellaneous Workflows, click the plus sign (+) next to External LDAP server synchronization. 7 Select System policy for Syncing external LDAP users. 8 In the right pane, click Run policy. Changing the yourdescriptionattrib variable or the yourmailattrib variable in your directory service s ldap.xml file If you change the yourdescriptionattrib variable or the yourmailattrib variable in your directory service, you need to update PureDisk s /etc/puredisk/ldap.xml file. To change the yourdescriptionattrib variable or yourmailattrib variable 1 Use your directory service s methods to change the object class names in your directory service source files. 2 Log into the storage pool authority node as root. 3 Edit file /etc/puredisk/ldap.xml to reflect the changes that you made to your directory service.

45 External directory service authentication Disabling external authentication 45 4 Log into the PureDisk Web UI. 5 Click Settings > Configuration tab. 6 In the left pane, expand LDAP Server. 7 Select External LDAP. 8 In the right pane, click Manage User Groups. 9 Select each group. 10 Click Remove. 11 Click Save. 12 Run the system policy for synchronizing external directory service users. Complete the following steps: Click Manage > Policies. In the left pane, under Miscellaneous Workflows, click the plus sign (+) next to External LDAP server synchronization. Select System policy for Syncing external LDAP users. In the left pane, click Run policy. 13 Use the procedure in the following topic to add the user groups back: See Managing user groups on page Run the system policy for synchronizing external directory service users again. The instructions for how to run this policy are in step 12. Disabling external authentication You can disable external authentication and enable PureDisk s internal OpenLDAP authentication. You might want to change authentication if the external directory service is down or unavailable. Note: If you disable external directory service authentication, PureDisk disables TLS, too. If you re-enable external directory service authentication, remember to re-enable TLS at that time. To change the authentication method 1 Click Settings > Configuration. 2 In the left pane, click the plus (+) sign to the left of LDAP Server.

46 46 External directory service authentication Changing the TLS specification 3 Select External LDAP. 4 In the right pane, clear the Enable LDAP Authentication box. When this box is clear, PureDisk uses its internal directory service to authenticate users. 5 Click Save. 6 Run the system policy for synchronizing external directory service users. Complete the following steps: Click Manage > Policies. In the left pane, under Miscellaneous Workflows, click the plus sign (+) next to External LDAP server synchronization. Select System policy for Syncing external LDAP users. In the right pane, click Run policy. Changing the TLS specification You can enable or disable your site s TLS specification after its initial configuration. To change the TLS specification 1 Click Settings > Configuration. 2 In the left pane, click the plus (+) sign to the left of LDAP server. 3 Select External LDAP. 4 Change the specification, as follows: To enable TLS, check the Enable TLS for LDAP Communication box. To disable TLS, clear the Enable TLS for LDAP Communication box. 5 Click Save. 6 Log in to the storage pool authority as root. 7 Type the following command to restart pdweb: # /etc/init.d/puredisk restart pdweb Modifying the base search path You can modify the information in the Base Search Path field. You can use this procedure if you change the hierarchy in your external directory service.

47 External directory service authentication Modifying the base search path 47 To modify the base search path 1 Click Settings > Configuration. 2 In the left pane, click the plus (+) sign to the left of LDAP server. 3 Select External LDAP. 4 In the right pane, in the Base Search Path field, change the search path. 5 Click Save. 6 Run the system policy for synchronizing external directory service users. Complete the following steps: Click Manage > Policies tab. In the left pane, under Miscellaneous Workflows, click the plus sign (+) next to External LDAP server synchronization. Select System policy for Syncing external LDAP users. In the right pane, click Run policy.

48 48 External directory service authentication Modifying the base search path

49 Chapter 2 Single-port communication This chapter includes the following topics: About single port communication Configuring single-port communication About single port communication Single port communication directs all network communication through one TCP/IP port. By default, network communication between clients and nodes occurs on multiple ports. This communication requires multiple open ports between hosts. You might want to reconfigure your storage pool to use the single-port communication feature, depending on the security requirements at your site. PureDisk supports multiport environments. However, storage pools that you modify to use single port communication require fewer firewall ports to be open between PureDisk services and PureDisk clients. You can implement single-port communication at any time, but this feature is easier to implement right after an initial installation and before you run any backups. The only prerequisite for this feature is that the storage pool be defined in terms of fully qualified domain names (FQDNs). If your storage pool is defined in terms of host names or IP addresses, perform the procedures for converting host names or IP addresses to FQDNs that the following manual describes: See the PureDisk Administrator s Guide. Configuring single-port communication The examples in the reconfiguration procedure assume a storage pool with two PureDisk nodes and two clients.

50 50 Single-port communication Configuring single-port communication Table 2-1 shows the example storage pool. Table 2-1 Example environment Entity Client 1 Client 2 Firewall PureDisk node 1, which hosts the following services: IP address IP-out1 IP-in3 IP-in4, IP-out2, IP-out3, IP-out4, IP-out5, IP-out6, and so on. IP-in1 Content router 1 Controller 1 Metabase engine 1 Metabase server NetBackup export engine Storage pool authority PureDisk node 2, which hosts the following services: IP-in2 Content router 2 Controller 2 Metabase engine 2 The preceding table uses the following abbreviations: IP-inx is an IP address behind the firewall and in a private range. For example, through IP-outx is an IP address outside the firewall somewhere on the internet. To configure single-port communication 1 Analyze the ports currently used and configure the firewall. See Configuring your domain name server (DNS) and firewall on page Add an FQDN to each PureDisk service. See Adding FQDNs to each service on page Create the department for which you want to use single-port communication. See Creating a new department with single-port settings on page 53.

51 Single-port communication Configuring single-port communication 51 4 Edit the configuration and specify the single-port number. See Specifying port number 443 as the default port in the configuration file template on page (Conditional) Configure the single port in replication policies. Perform this step if other storage pools replicate data to this storage pool. See (Conditional) Configuring port 443 in replication policies on page Assign clients to the new department that uses single ports. See Installing agent software on the clients or moving clients on page 58. Configuring your domain name server (DNS) and firewall The procedure in this topic helps you to analyze and configure your site s DNS and firewall. To configure your DNS and firewall 1 On your DNS, configure the ports that the storage pool uses. Use your firewall software s documentation to help you determine the inbound ports and outbound ports that are in use at this time. Perform the following tasks: Determine which services are behind the firewall. Make sure that the DNS can resolve the correct IP address regardless of whether the client is on the internet or behind the firewall. The example storage pool uses the following ports: DNS name (in FQDN format) PureDiskCR1.acme.com PureDiskCR2.acme.com PureDiskCTRL1.acme.com PureDiskCTRL.acme.com2 PureDiskSPA.acme.com PureDiskMBS.acme.com Client 1 (outside the firewall) IP-out3 IP-out4 IP-out5 IP-out6 IP-out2 IP-out2 Client 2 (inside the firewall) IP-in1 IP-in2 IP-in1 IP-in2 IP-in1 IP-in1

52 52 Single-port communication Configuring single-port communication PureDiskDebug.acme.com IP-out7 IP-in1 2 Configure the firewall to translate the IP addresses and outside ports to inside addresses and inside ports. Use your firewall software s documentation to help you translate the ports. In the example storage pool, the translations are as follows for the outside ports: Outside IP IP-out2 IP-out3 IP-out4 IP-out5 IP-out6 IP-out7 Outside port In the example storage pool, the translations are as follows for the inside ports: Inside IP IP-in1 IP-in1 IP-in2 IP-in1 IP-in2 IP-in1 Inside port Proceed to the following: See Adding FQDNs to each service on page 53.

53 Single-port communication Configuring single-port communication 53 Adding FQDNs to each service The following procedure explains how to add an FQDN to each service s configuration information. To add FQDN information for each service 1 Click Settings > Topology. 2 Expand all the items in the left pane so that PureDisk displays all storage pool services. 3 Select a service and add the FQDN information. For example, select the first content router that appears and complete the following steps: Type the FQDN for this particular service into the Host Name (FQDN) field. This field accepts a host name, but to enable this feature, specify the FQDN for this particular service. Click Save. 4 Repeat step 3 for each content router, metabase engine, metabase server, storage pool authority, and NetBackup export engine service on every node. Do not perform these steps for the metabase engines. For the metabase engines, PureDisk updates the FQDN information automatically when you update the storage pool authority and the controller, respectively. 5 Proceed to the following: See Creating a new department with single-port settings on page 53. Creating a new department with single-port settings The clients that you want to enable as single-port clients need a customized configuration file and a department that is dedicated to single-port use. The procedures in this topic explain how to create a new department and how to apply client configuration file templates to this new department. PureDisk ignores any leading or trailing spaces that you specify in a department name. Note: Make sure to add a new department. The single-port feature does not work if you add a new location. Use the procedures in this topic as follows:

54 54 Single-port communication Configuring single-port communication To implement the single-port feature for a new installation OR To implement the single-port feature for an existing installation in which the clients you want to enable as single-port clients reside in different departments Perform the following tasks: Create a new department. See (Conditional) Creating a new department on page 54. Create a new configuration template. See Creating a new configuration template on page 55. Assign the new template to the new department. See Assigning the a new configuration template to a new department on page 55. To implement the single-port feature in an existing storage pool when the clients to be enabled as single-port clients reside in the same department, perform the following tasks: Create a new configuration template. See Creating a new configuration template on page 55. Assign the new template to the new department. See Assigning the a new configuration template to a new department on page 55. (Conditional) Creating a new department Perform the procedure in this topic under the following circumstances: To implement the single-port feature for a new installation To implement the single-port feature for an existing installation in which the clients you want to enable as single-port clients reside in different departments To create a new department 1 Click Settings > Configuration. 2 In the left pane, expand User management > Departments. 3 Select Departments. 4 In the right pane, click Add Department. 5 In the Department Name field, type in a name for this new department. For example, assume that you want to name this department for single port use. You can call this department ATOP Dept, which means All Through One Port Department.

55 Single-port communication Configuring single-port communication 55 6 Click Add. 7 Proceed to the following: See Creating a new configuration template on page 55. Creating a new configuration template This procedure explains how to create a new configuration template. To create a new configuration template 1 Click Settings > Configuration. 2 In the left pane, expand Configuration file templates > PureDisk Client Agent. 3 Select Default ValueSet for PureDisk Client Agent. 4 In the right pane, click Copy ValueSet. 5 In the left pane, select Copy of Default ValueSet for PureDisk Client Agent. 6 In the right pane, in the ValueSet Name (new) field, type a new name. For example, ATOP Template. 7 Click Save. 8 Proceed to the following: See Assigning the a new configuration template to a new department on page 55. Assigning the a new configuration template to a new department This procedure explains how to assign a new configuration template to a new department. To assign the new configuration template to the new department 1 Click Settings > Configuration. 2 In the left pane, expand Configuration file templates > PureDisk Client Agent. 3 Select the new template you created in the following procedure: See Creating a new configuration template on page 55. For example, select ATOP Template. 4 In the right pane, click Assign Template.

56 56 Single-port communication Configuring single-port communication 5 Click the box to the left of the name of the new department. For example, click to the left of ATOP Dept. 6 Click Assign. 7 Proceed to the following: See Specifying port number 443 as the default port in the configuration file template on page 56. Specifying port number 443 as the default port in the configuration file template The following procedure explains the configuration sections that you need to edit to specify that PureDisk use single port 443 for client communication. This feature supports single-port communication only through port 443. After you specify port 443, you can install the agent software on your clients. When you install the agent software, specify the new department that you created that uses the single port. These new clients assume the specifications in the new configuration template that you assigned to the new department. To specify port 443 as the default port 1 Click Settings > Configuration. 2 In the left pane, expand Configuration file templates > PureDisk Client Agent. 3 Expand the new template that you created in the following procedure: See Creating a new configuration template on page 55. For example, expand ATOP Template. 4 Expand the following objects: contentrouter > port ctrl > tcport debug > dldport 5 Under the expanded contentrouter > port, select All OS: portnumber. 6 In the Value field, type Click Save.

57 Single-port communication Configuring single-port communication 57 8 Repeat the following steps to change the port value to 443 for the ctrl>tcport field and the debug > dldport field: Step 6 Step 7 9 Perform one of the following tasks: (Conditional) Configure port 443 in replication policies See (Conditional) Configuring port 443 in replication policies on page 57. Install the agent software on the clients or move the clients See Installing agent software on the clients or moving clients on page 58. (Conditional) Configuring port 443 in replication policies You might have upgraded to PureDisk 6.6 and have replication policies on other storage pools. These policies may need to push data through port 443 to this storage pool. The following procedure explains how to configure such policies. For example, assume that you have two storage pools. Their names are Remote and Central. You have upgraded both storage pools to PureDisk 6.6, and you configured Central to use single-port communication. If you replicate data from Remote to Central, you need to log into Remote and perform the following procedure. To configure replication policies to send data to port Log into the storage pool authority Web UI on the storage pool that replicates data. For example, if you replicate data from storage pool Remote to storage pool Central, log into storage pool Remote. 2 Click Manage > Policies. 3 In the left pane, expand the tree to expose the replication policies that send data to the other storage pool. 4 Complete the following steps to edit a replication policy: Select a replication policy. Click the Parameters tab. Type 443 into the Communication Port field. Click Save.

58 58 Single-port communication Configuring single-port communication 5 Repeat step 3 for each replication policy. 6 Proceed to the following: See Installing agent software on the clients or moving clients on page 58. Installing agent software on the clients or moving clients Perform one of the following procedures to assign clients to the department that uses single ports. The procedure to use depends on whether you performed an initial installation or an upgrade. Installing agent software for an initial installation Perform the following procedure to enable single-port communication after an initial installation. To install the agent software and specify the name of the new department Use the procedures in the following manual to install the PureDisk agent software on each new client: See the PureDisk Client Installation Guide. When the software prompts you for a department name, specify the name of the new department you created that uses the single port. Moving clients to the new department for an upgrade Perform the following procedure to enable single-port communication after an upgrade. To move clients to the new department 1 Click Manage > Agent. 2 In the left pane, expand the tree to expose the clients that you need to move. 3 Complete the following steps to edit each client and add the new department: Select a client. In the right pane, in the Properties: Agent panel, use the Department drop-down list to select the department you created for single-port communication. Click Save. 4 Repeat step 3 for each client that you need to move to the new department.

59 Chapter 3 Data replication This chapter includes the following topics: About data replication About data replication and PureDisk release levels About data replication policies Creating or editing a data replication policy Replication jobs Copying and deleting a replication policy Managing replicated data selections Tuning replication About data replication When PureDisk runs a data replication policy, it copies the backed up PureDisk data selections from one storage pool to another storage pool. The data replication process copies file data and file metadata. First, PureDisk takes a snapshot of the data selection. Next, it copies the data within the snapshot to a different data selection in a different storage pool. For example, you can create a policy to replicate backed-up data selections from a small storage pool in a small office's location to a large storage pool in a central location. If you have a work group in a small office that is connected to your headquarters over a relatively slow WAN, you can replicate data from that small office to the headquarters location if you have a storage pool in both locations. The PureDisk storage pool in the small office is an all-in-one storage pool; all of the PureDisk services are installed on a single node. Your headquarters has other, larger storage pools. For safety and security reasons, a copy of all data must be

60 60 Data replication About data replication and PureDisk release levels available at headquarters at all times. You can create a replication policy to copy data from the remote storage pool to the headquarters storage pool at regular intervals, such as nightly. The data replication process does not copy system data such as data selections or policies that you configured. You can preserve this system data through storage pool authority replication. For more information about storage pool authority replication, see the following: See About storage pool authority replication (SPAR) on page 199. You can run a replication policy at any time. However, if the policy includes any data selections that PureDisk has not yet backed up, the replication policy does not replicate those data selections. A replication policy copies only backed up data selections. Additionally, replication jobs and content router rerouting jobs cannot run simultaneously. If you start a replication job and then start a rerouting job, PureDisk stops the replication job. Note: If you experience replication job performance degradation and you have a high-latency communication network between the two storage pools, you can possibly improve performance by changing some default TCP/IP settings. For more information, see "About changing TCP/IP settings to improve replication job performance" in the PureDisk Best Practices Guide, Chapter 5: Tuning PureDisk. The following contain more information about replication: See About data replication and PureDisk release levels on page 60. See About data replication policies on page 61. See Creating or editing a data replication policy on page 62. See Replication jobs on page 68. See Copying and deleting a replication policy on page 68. See Managing replicated data selections on page 68. See Tuning replication on page 71. About data replication and PureDisk release levels Examine the release level of each storage pool before you implement replication. To verify the PureDisk version of a storage pool, click About in the Web UI. The rules for replication and release levels are as follows:

61 Data replication About data replication policies 61 You can replicate between storage pools if each storage pool is at the same release level. You can replicate between storage pools when the destination storage pool is at a release level that is higher than the source storage pool. However, Symantec recommends that you install all your storage pools with the same PureDisk release. For example, Symantec supports replication between a source storage pool at the PureDisk 6.5.x release level and a destination storage pool at the PureDisk 6.6 release level. Symantec does not guarantee data integrity when you replicate between storage pools with other nonidentical release levels. You cannot replicate between storage pools when the destination storage pool is at a release level that is lower than the source storage pool. About data replication policies Typically, you create data replication policies only after some backups have completed. Replication policies apply to a source storage pool. You can specify the destination storage pool, but you cannot specify the name for the replicated data selection(s) on the destination storage pool. For more information about how to create data replication polices, see the following: See Creating or editing a data replication policy on page 62. When you run a replication policy for the first time, PureDisk creates data selections on the destination storage pool. You can create and run an additional replication policy that includes the data selections from the first policy. If you run additional policies, PureDisk creates the additional data selections on the destination storage pool. For example, assume that a source storage pool runs replication policy AAA. Policy AAA replicates data selections 111, 222, and 333 to a destination storage pool. PureDisk creates three data selections for the replication. Assume that you later create replication policy BBB to replicate data selection 111 again. PureDisk creates an additional data selection for data selection 111. PureDisk keeps track of the data that has been replicated. Consequently, when you run a specific replication policy again, PureDisk forwards only the new data to the destination storage pool. Specifically, the new data is data that was added to the data selection(s) since the previous policy run. Any clients that own the source data selections are also replicated to the destination storage pool. PureDisk displays the replicated clients and data

62 62 Data replication Creating or editing a data replication policy selections with a special icon when you click Manage > Agent on the destination storage pool s Web UI. Note: You can delete data from a data selection when you run a removal policy. PureDisk does not remove this data automatically from a replicated data selection. PureDisk does not replicate delete actions. If you want to keep the source and the replicated data selection identical, define similar removal policies for both data selections. After you create and run a policy to replicate data from a source storage pool to a destination storage pool, you can do the following: View the replicated data on the destination storage pool. For more information about how to view replicated data, see the following: See Replication jobs on page 68. Use restore functions to copy the replicated data to a client that is attached to the destination storage pool. For more information about how to copy replicated data, see the following: See Copying replicated data to clients on the destination storage pool on page 70. Restore the replicated data back to the original client or another client on the source storage pool. For more information about how to restore replicated data, see the following: See Restoring replicated data back to clients on the source storage pool on page 70. Creating or editing a data replication policy The following procedure explains how to create a new data replication policy and how to edit an existing data replication policy. To create or edit a replication policy 1 Select Manage > Policies. 2 In the left pane, under Data Management Policies, click Replication. 3 Complete one of the following steps: To create a policy, in the right pane click Create Policy. To edit a policy, expand Replication and click a policy name. 4 Complete the General tab. See Completing the General tab for a Replication policy on page 63.

63 Data replication Creating or editing a data replication policy 63 5 Complete the Data Selections tab. See Completing the Data Selections tab for a Replication policy on page Complete the Scheduling tab. See Completing the Scheduling tab for a Replication policy on page Complete the Parameters tab. See Completing the Parameters tab for a Replication policy on page Click Add. Completing the General tab for a Replication policy The following procedure explains how to complete this tab. To complete the General tab 1 Type a name for this policy in the Name field. 2 Select Enabled or Disabled. This setting lets you control whether PureDisk runs the policy according to the schedule you specify in the Scheduling tab, as in the following situations: If you select Enabled, PureDisk runs the policy according to the schedule. If you select Disabled, PureDisk does not run the policy according to the schedule. Disabled is the default. For example, you might want to stop running this policy during a system maintenance period. If you select Disabled, you do not need to enter

64 64 Data replication Creating or editing a data replication policy information in the Scheduling tab to suspend and then reenable this policy. 3 (Optional) Specify an escalation action. PureDisk can notify you if replication does not complete within a specified time. For example, you can configure PureDisk to send an message to an individual if a replication policy workflow does not complete in an hour. Select times in the Escalatewarningafter or the Escalateerrorandterminate after drop-down boxes to specify the elapsed time. If the policy workflow does not complete before the warning timeout, PureDisk generates a warning event. If the policy workflow does not complete before the error timeout, PureDisk generates an error event. If you select either option, you must create a policy and an event escalation action. These escalation actions define the message, define its recipients, and associate the escalation action with the policy. For more information about policy and event escalations, see the following: See the PureDisk Backup Operator s Guide. Completing the Data Selections tab for a Replication policy The Data Selections tab displays a tree view. From this view, you can select one or more data selections to include in the policy. From this tab, you can also specify filters for PureDisk to apply to the data selections you choose. You can filter on the data selection name or the description. You also can specify a data selection template as the filter. If you use a filter, PureDisk applies the filter when the policy runs. To specify data selections 1 Click Data Selection. 2 Select a data selection type from the Data Selection Type drop-down list.

65 Data replication Creating or editing a data replication policy 65 3 Expand the tree and select one or more data selections. To make a selection, click in the box to the left of the label. To select a number of data selections, select a storage pool or department. This action selects all data selections that exist under the storage pool or department. A data selection is associated with a client. PureDisk applies the policy to all selected data selections and the associated clients when you save the policy. If a replication policy includes any data selections that belong to an inactive client, PureDisk replicates that inactive client s data selections. If you do not select a data selection in the tree, PureDisk uses all data selections in the storage pool. 4 Decide whether you want to include all the data selections you checked in step 3. Proceed as follows: If you want to include all the data selections in the box, make sure that Include all data selections selected above is selected. Proceed to See Completing the Scheduling tab for a Replication policy on page 66. If you want to exclude, or filter out some data selections, select Apply all inclusion rules below to dataselections selected above. Proceed to step 5. 5 (Optional) Specify one of the following filter methods: Fill in the Data selection name or Data selection description fields. Use wildcard characters (* and?) to filter the data selections. You can filter on the data selection name field or on the data selection description field. For example, assume that the following data selection names exist and that they were selected under a department in the tree: U_*.jpg_files W_*.jpg_files W_*.xls_files If you type *files in the Data selection name field, the policy backs up all three data selections. If you type W* in the field, the data selections for this policy include only the data selections that are named W_*.jpg_files and W_*.xls_files. For more information on filtering, see the following: See the PureDisk Backup Operator s Guide.

66 66 Data replication Creating or editing a data replication policy Select a template from the Data selections based on template drop-down list to specify an existing data selection template to use. PureDisk uses all data selections that it linked to the template. This action assumes that the template was previously applied to the client. Completing the Scheduling tab for a Replication policy Create a schedule that lets you save your key data items after any regular company processes have updated the data. For optimal performance, schedule removal policies for replicated data selections on the destination storage pool to run at different times as the replication policy on the source storage pool. To specify the schedule 1 Click Scheduling. 2 Select hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly to specify how frequently you want this policy to run. 3 Select schedule details. The detail options that PureDisk displays depend on whether you selected an hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly schedule in the preceding step. Completing the Parameters tab for a Replication policy The following procedure explains how to complete the Parameters tab. To complete the Parameters tab 1 Click Parameters. 2 In the IP of the remote SPA field, type the IP address or the FQDN for the destination (remote) storage pool. Symantec recommends that you specify an FQDN. 3 In the Login remote SPA field, type the login ID for the destination (remote) storage pool. 4 In the Password remote SPA field, type the password for the destination (remote) storage pool.

67 Data replication Creating or editing a data replication policy 67 5 (Optional) In the Communication Port field, type the open communication port of the storage pool that is used for replication. By default, this port is If you enabled single port communication, specify port number 443. For more information about single ports, see the following: See the PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide. 6 In the Type of Replication field, select one of the following: Select Normal to include images of any new files or changed files since the full replication. Typically, you can select Normal. Select Reverify all to provide a complete copy of all the files that were specified in the data selection. Select Reverify all if you suspect that a problem exists on your destination storage pool. For example, content router corruption or a complete storage pool crash. 7 (Optional) Type a bandwidth size to use when files are transferred. If you leave this field blank, PureDisk by default uses the maximum bandwidth for the network. This field lets you specify the maximum network bandwidth to use during the backup. For example, if you specify 50 Kbps, the agent uploads data at that rate to the content routers. This number is an average. The peak bandwidth usage can be higher than the number specified, but the average bandwidth usage cannot. 8 Check or clear the Force encryption box. When you check this option, PureDisk encrypts and compresses the data over the wire during transmission between the source storage pool and the destination storage pool. If you want the data to arrive at the destination storage pool in an encrypted state, specify encryption in the backup policy on the source storage pool. 9 (Optional) In the Define backup window field, select a start time and end time for the backup window from the drop-downs. PureDisk queues the job at the time you specify in the Scheduling tab. Other jobs in the queue might prevent PureDisk from running the job immediately. When you specify a start time and an end time, you ensure that the job does not start outside of this period. In addition, PureDisk stops the job if the job does not end before the end time that you specify. Make sure that the start time you specify falls within this replication window.

68 68 Data replication Replication jobs Replication jobs 10 (Optional) Click Set as defaults. If you select this option, PureDisk uses these settings for all replication policies that you create later. 11 Click Add to save the policy. PureDisk runs replication jobs on the source storage pool. PureDisk creates virtual agents on the destination (remote) storage pool when you implement replication. PureDisk runs the following types of jobs on virtual agents: Imports of forwarded data during replication Data removal Maintenance Copying and deleting a replication policy The following procedure explains how to copy or delete a replication policy. To copy or delete a replication policy 1 Select Manage > Policies. 2 In the left pane, under Data Management Policies, expand Replication. To expand Replication, click the plus sign (+) to the left of the Replication label. 3 Select the replication policy that you want to copy or delete. 4 In the right pane, click one of the following: Copy Policy Delete Policy Managing replicated data selections The following information pertains to managing replicated data selections: See Viewing replicated data on page 69. See Working with replicated agents and data selections on page 69.

69 Data replication Managing replicated data selections 69 See Copying replicated data to clients on the destination storage pool on page 70. See Restoring replicated data back to clients on the source storage pool on page 70. See Restoring replicated Oracle data on page 71. Viewing replicated data After you run a replication policy, the replicated client and its data selections appear in the destination (remote) storage pool's Web UI The destination storage pool displays both information about its own clients and information about replicated data from other storage pools. PureDisk differentiates replicated client names and replicated data selection names. In the destination storage pool s Web UI, an [R] icon to the left of the client name indicates a replicated data selection. PureDisk uses this icon on the destination storage pool for replicated clients and replicated client data selections. The following procedure explains how to view replicated data selections. To view replicated data 1 Log on to the Web UI of the destination storage pool. 2 Click Manage > Agent. 3 In the left pane, select the replicated client. The icon for a replicated client includes [R] and the name of the client. When click a client name, client information appears in the right pane. Working with replicated agents and data selections The first time PureDisk replicates a data selection, the replicated data selection always appears in the Unknown location and in the Unknown department. The replicated data selection appears this way regardless of the location and department that hosted the data selection on the source storage pool. You can move the data selection to a different location and department after this first replication. Never rename the Unknown location or the Unknown department. PureDisk looks for these containers when it replicates data selections. PureDisk puts the first of all replicated data selections in these containers.

70 70 Data replication Managing replicated data selections Copying replicated data to clients on the destination storage pool The following procedure explains how to copy replicated data. To copy replicated data to clients on the destination storage pool 1 Log on to the Web UI of the destination storage pool. 2 Click Manage > Agent. 3 In the left pane, select the replicated client. The icon for a replicated client includes [R] and the name of the client. When click a client name, client information appears in the right pane. 4 Use the PureDisk restore functions to copy the data. For more information about how to restore data, see the following: See the PureDisk Backup Operator s Guide. Restoring replicated data back to clients on the source storage pool You can restore replicated data only to clients that are currently connected to the destination storage pool. You can replicate an MS Exchange, MS SQL, Oracle, Oracle UDJ, or System State and Services data selection to another storage pool. To restore data, treat the client to which you want to restore the data as if it were an alternate client. For more information about alternate client restores of application data, see the PureDisk Backup Operator s Guide. The following procedure assumes that the original client system can no longer be used for some reason or the original data is corrupted. To restore replicated data back to clients on the source storage pool 1 Install PureDisk on the client where you want to restore data. See the PureDisk Client Installation Guide. 2 Log on to the Web UI of the destination storage pool. This is the storage pool that received the replicated data from the source storage pool. 3 Click Manage > Agent.

71 Data replication Tuning replication 71 4 In the left pane, select the replicated client. The icon for a replicated client includes [R] and the name of the client. When click a client name, client information appears in the right pane. 5 In the right pane, select Restore Files. Restoring replicated Oracle data Tuning replication When you restore a data selection, select the new client of the source storage pool as the destination client. See the PureDisk Backup Operator's Guide for information about how to perform the restore. You need to perform some additional configuration steps if you want to restore Oracle data that you replicated to another storage pool. For more information about these configuration steps, see the PureDisk Backup Operator's Guide. PureDisk includes configuration parameters that you can manipulate in order to tune replication performance. For information about tuning, see the following: See Tuning replication performance on page 337.

72 72 Data replication Tuning replication

73 Chapter 4 Exporting data to NetBackup This chapter includes the following topics: About exporting data to NetBackup Configuring PureDisk and NetBackup for export capability Creating or editing an export to NetBackup policy Running an export to NetBackup policy Performing a point-in-time export to NetBackup Troubleshooting export job failures Copying or deleting an export to NetBackup policy Restoring from NetBackup Restoring to a PureDisk client that is not a NetBackup client Restoring to a PureDisk client that is also a NetBackup client About exporting data to NetBackup The NetBackup export engine lets you back up your PureDisk files to NetBackup tape or disk. The export engine lets you export a backed up Files and Folders data selection from a PureDisk content router to NetBackup. NetBackup then catalogs the data and writes it to tape or disk in NetBackup s file format. You can use these files for long-term data protection. If you ever delete the files from the original client or from PureDisk storage, you can restore them from NetBackup.

74 74 Exporting data to NetBackup About exporting data to NetBackup After you export the PureDisk files to NetBackup, you can treat these files as if they were native NetBackup files. From the NetBackup administration console, you can generate NetBackup reports, browse the files, and manage the files. To restore the data that you exported to NetBackup, use the NetBackup procedures that are described in the NetBackup administration guides. The following provide an overview of the NetBackup export engine: See Export limitations on page 74. See Requirements for exporting data to NetBackup on page 74. See Requirements for restoring data from NetBackup on page 75. See Enabling and using the NetBackup export engine on page 75. Export limitations The PureDisk NetBackup export engine lets you export backed up PureDisk Files and Folders data selections to NetBackup. The NetBackup export engine does not export other PureDisk data selection types. When you choose data selections for export, a tree structure appears in the Web UI, and you make your selection from the tree. Be aware that PureDisk exports only the Files and Folders data selections in the tree. For example, if you select a storage pool that has many types of data selections, PureDisk exports only the Files and Folders data selections. In addition, if you choose to export replicated data from a target storage pool, PureDisk exports only the replicated Files and Folders data selections. Requirements for exporting data to NetBackup The ability to export Files and Folders data selections from PureDisk to NetBackup requires the following NetBackup software and licenses: NetBackup 6.0 MP5 or later NetBackup client A NetBackup DataStore license and NetBackup client license When you export PureDisk data to NetBackup, you use a NetBackup DataStore policy. This feature requires that you install a NetBackup DataStore license on the NetBackup server. The PureDisk license key includes a NetBackup DataStore license. Contact your Symantec sales representative to obtain the required software and license.

75 Exporting data to NetBackup Configuring PureDisk and NetBackup for export capability 75 Requirements for restoring data from NetBackup The exported Files and Folders data selections become NetBackup files after you export them. You can use NetBackup restore methods to restore the files. The host to which you restore the data selections must run NetBackup release 6.0 MP5 or later. When you restore the PureDisk data, you perform the restore from NetBackup, and you restore to NetBackup. If necessary, you can use a network transfer method to move the data to the correct PureDisk client. If you want to put the files back under PureDisk control again, use PureDisk to back them up. Enabling and using the NetBackup export engine The following explain how to enable and use the NetBackup export engine: See Configuring PureDisk and NetBackup for export capability on page 75. See Creating or editing an export to NetBackup policy on page 85. See Running an export to NetBackup policy on page 91. See Performing a point-in-time export to NetBackup on page 91. See Troubleshooting export job failures on page 92. See Copying or deleting an export to NetBackup policy on page 94. See Restoring from NetBackup on page 94. See Restoring to a PureDisk client that is not a NetBackup client on page 96. See Restoring to a PureDisk client that is also a NetBackup client on page 97. Configuring PureDisk and NetBackup for export capability To enable the PureDisk export capability, you must configure both of the following components on the same PureDisk node: The PureDisk NetBackup export engine. To configure this engine, install the PureDisk nbu service on this node. When you install the nbu service, you enable this node to export data from this PureDisk storage pool to a NetBackup environment. You can install the nbu service at initial installation time, or you can add it later. The NetBackup client software. These clients are distributed with NetBackup.

76 76 Exporting data to NetBackup Configuring PureDisk and NetBackup for export capability You can configure the required software on its own dedicated node, or you can configure this software on a node with other PureDisk services. Figure 4-1 shows the software that you need to configure to enable PureDisk exports to NetBackup.

77 Exporting data to NetBackup Configuring PureDisk and NetBackup for export capability 77 Figure 4-1 Example environment for exporting PureDisk data to NetBackup The figure shows a multinode PureDisk environment attached to a NetBackup environment, as follows:

78 78 Exporting data to NetBackup Configuring PureDisk and NetBackup for export capability Label Object PureDisk storage pool NetBackup environment PureDisk node_1, which hosts the following services: Storage pool authority Metabase server Metabase engine NetBackup export engine NetBackup client 4 5 PureDisk node_2, which hosts a content router service PureDisk node_3, which hosts the following services: NetBackup export engine NetBackup client 6 7 PureDisk client kwiek. PureDisk client speedy. Both node_1 and node_3 host a PureDisk NetBackup export engine and the NetBackup client software. In this storage pool, node_3 can be a low-end computer because it only serves to transfer data. If you had an all-in-one PureDisk environment, you would have to install the NetBackup client on that one node. The figure shows two clients: kwiek and speedy. The NetBackup export engine on node_1 exports data from kwiek. The NetBackup export engine on node_3 exports data from speedy. To perform a direct restore of files from NetBackup to speedy, install the NetBackup client software on speedy. Configure the PureDisk environment first, and then configure NetBackup. To configure PureDisk and NetBackup to export PureDisk data selections Complete the following procedures: See Configuring NetBackup to receive data exported from PureDisk on page 79. See Configuring PureDisk to export data to NetBackup on page 84.

79 Exporting data to NetBackup Configuring PureDisk and NetBackup for export capability 79 Configuring NetBackup to receive data exported from PureDisk The procedure in this topic explains how to configure NetBackup to accept PureDisk data. To configure NetBackup for PureDisk export capability 1 Install the NetBackup Linux SUSE 2.6 client on each PureDisk node. Both the PureDisk NetBackup export engine service and the NetBackup client need to be running together on the same PureDisk node or nodes. When you install a NetBackup Linux client, the following message might appear: No [x]inetd process found. Ignore this message. A later step in this procedure starts the xinetd daemon. For information about how to install the NetBackup client, see the following: See the NetBackup Installation Guide for UNIX and Linux. 2 (Conditional) For each PureDisk node, create a file for the host FQDN and another file for the service FQDN in the altnames directory on the NetBackup master server. Perform this step if the storage pool you want to back up is clustered. This step is needed because the bp.conf file on each node contains the physical host address. However, the backup process and the restore process use the service address. If necessary, create the altnames directory itself. Within the altnames directory, use the touch(1) command to create a file for each node's host FQDN and each node's service FQDN. Example 1. To create the altnames directory on a UNIX master server, type the following command: # mkdir /usr/openv/netbackup/db/altnames Example 2. Assume that you want to create file names in the altnames directory of a UNIX NetBackup master server for the nodes in the following two-node cluster: Node 1 = allinone.acme.com (host FQDN) and allinones.acme.com (service FQDN) Node 2 = passive.acme.com (host FQDN) and passives.acme.com (service FQDN)

80 80 Exporting data to NetBackup Configuring PureDisk and NetBackup for export capability For the all-in-one node (node 1), type the following commands on the master server to create the correct files in the altnames directory: # touch allinone.acme.com # touch allinones.acme.com For the passive node (node 2), type the following command on the master server to create the correct files in the altnames directory: # touch passive.acme.com # touch passives.acme.com For more information about the altnames directory and creating files inside the altnames directory, see the following: See the NetBackup Administrator s Guide, Volume I. 3 Determine if NetBackup access control (NBAC) is enabled in your NetBackup environment. One way to tell if NBAC is enabled is to examine the bp.conf file. If the USE_VXSS = AUTOMATIC or USE_VXSS = REQUIRED appear, then NBAC is enabled. If NBAC is enabled, proceed to step 4. For more information about NBAC, see the NetBackup Security and Encryption Guide. If NBAC is not enabled, proceed to step 6. 4 (Conditional) On the NetBackup master server, configure NBAC for the PureDisk nodes. Perform this step if NBAC is enabled in your NetBackup environment. Log into the NetBackup master server and complete the following steps: Change to the directory where the bpnbat command resides. On UNIX master servers, the bpnbat command resides in /usr/openv/netbackup/bin. On Windows master servers, the bpnbat command resides in install_path\netbackup\bin. Type the following command to add the PureDisk node to NBAC: bpnbat -addmachine

81 Exporting data to NetBackup Configuring PureDisk and NetBackup for export capability 81 The bpnbat command prompts you for the machine name, prompts you to create an NBAC password, and prompts you to confirm the password. For the machine name, type the FQDN of the PureDisk node. Change to the directory where the bpnbaz command resides. On UNIX master servers, the bpnbaz command resides in /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/admincmd. On Windows master servers, the bpnbaz command resides in install_path\netbackup\bin\admincmd. Type the following commands to enable the PureDisk node to perform access checks: bpnbaz -allowauthorization pd_node_fqdn Operation completed successfully. Repeat the preceding bulleted steps for each PureDisk node that hosts a NetBackup client. For example, type the following commands on a UNIX master server: masterserver# cd /usr/openv/netbackup/bin masterserver# bpnbat -addmachine Machine Name: potato.idaho.com Password: ***** Password: ***** Operation completed successfully. masterserver# cd admincmd masterserver# bpnbaz -allowauthorization potato.idaho.com Operation completed successfully. 5 (Conditional) On the PureDisk node that hosts the NetBackup client software, install VxAT. Perform this step if NBAC is enabled in your NetBackup environment. Log into the PureDisk node as root. Type the following commands to create NBAC credentials for the node: puredisknode# cd /usr/openv/netbackup/bin/admincmd puredisknode# bpnbat -loginmachine Respond to the bpnbat command's prompts, which are as follows: Does this machine use Dymanic Host Configuration Protocol (DCHP)? (y/n)?

82 82 Exporting data to NetBackup Configuring PureDisk and NetBackup for export capability Type n, and press Enter. Authentication Broker: Specify the host name of the NetBackup authentication broker, and press Enter. Authentication port [Enter = default]: Press Enter to use the default authentication port. If your NetBackup environment uses a site-specific authentication port, type that port number. Machine name: Type the FQDN of the PureDisk node, and press Enter. Password: Type the password you created in step 4, and press Enter. Edit file bp.conf as follows: Add entries for the NetBackup master server and the NetBackup media server. Set the USE_VXSS = and (optionally) the AUTHENTICATION_DOMAIN = parameters as dictated by your site practices. You can set these parameters through the NetBackup administrator interface or by using commands. See your NetBackup administrator documentation for more information about how to edit the bp.conf file. Repeat the preceding bulleted steps for each node that hosts a NetBackup client. For example: puredisknode# cd /usr/openv/netbackup/bin puredisknode# bpnbat -loginmachine Does this machine use Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DCHP)? Authentication Broker: colonel.flagg.com Authentication port [Enter = default]: Machine Name: potato.idaho.com Password: ***** Operation completed successfully. (y/n)? n

83 Exporting data to NetBackup Configuring PureDisk and NetBackup for export capability 83 6 On each PureDisk node that you want to configure, make sure that the xinetd daemon is running. Enter the following command to determine if xinetd is running: # ps -aef grep xinetd If it is not running, enter the following command: # /etc/init.d/xinetd start To ensure that the xinetd daemon starts after you restart the system, type the following command: # chkconfig xinetd on 7 From a NetBackup administration console, create a DataStore policy with an Application Backup Schedule. A DataStore policy is a specific policy type. An Application Backup Schedule is the default schedule. For information about how to create this policy, see the NetBackup System Administrator s Guide, Volume I. The following are some guidelines for this policy: When you create this policy, make sure to specify a schedule for 24 hours a day and 7 days a week. This schedule leaves the policy open and available for whenever PureDisk needs to send data. Remember the name of this policy. You need to specify this name when you create the PureDisk Export to NetBackup policy. If you enable encryption, NetBackup asks you for a passphrase. NetBackup uses this passphrase for all data that you export from the client to NetBackup. Ensure that you use the same passphrase for the following: The NetBackup export engine The client upon which the source files reside All clients to which you might want to restore the exported data. If you want to export data to NetBackup from a clustered PureDisk storage pool, specify the nodes upon which the NetBackup export engine service resides. In NetBackup, specify the fully qualified domain names (FQDNs)

84 84 Exporting data to NetBackup Configuring PureDisk and NetBackup for export capability of the physical host for these nodes. These are the FQDNs of the physical nodes. Do not specify the service FQDNs. Configuring PureDisk to export data to NetBackup The following procedure explains how to configure PureDisk to export data selections to NetBackup. To configure a PureDisk environment to export data to NetBackup 1 Make sure that the NetBackup export engine service is included in the storage pool configuration, is installed on the node that you want to designate as the NetBackup export engine, and is activated. You can specify the nbu as a service on more than one node. For information about how to add a service, see the following: See About adding services on page 280. See Adding a service to a node on page 282. For information about how to activate the NetBackup export engine service, see the following: See Troubleshooting export job failures on page Use the procedure in the PureDisk Client Installation Guide to install and configure PureDisk on clients. You can configure clients with any number of features. However, you cannot enable a data lock password on a client if you want to export that client s data to NetBackup. If necessary, you can enable the data lock password for that client at install time. When the time comes to export data, you need to disable the password. Also note that client naming conventions differ between NetBackup and PureDisk. If the names of your PureDisk clients do not conform to NetBackup s client naming conventions, PureDisk transforms the client name to a compatible name. PureDisk changes the name internally, and you can see the result in log files and messages. In addition, you can check the names in the following file: /Storage/var/NbuExportClientNameChanges.txt By convention, NetBackup client names can include only the following characters: The uppercase English language alphabetic characters, A through Z The lowercase English language alphabetic characters, a through z

85 Exporting data to NetBackup Creating or editing an export to NetBackup policy 85 The digits, 0 through 9 A period (.) A hyphen (-) An underscore (_) Example 1: Assume that you have a PureDisk client named as follows: my agent name is strider PureDisk transforms this name to the following: my_agent_name_is_strider Example 2: Assume that you have two clients with the following names: my agent name is strider my agent_name*is strider To avoid duplication, PureDisk adds a counter to the end of the second name it encounters and transforms the names as follows: my_agent_name_is_strider my_agent_name_is_strider_2 3 Make sure that one or more data selections that you want to export have been created and backed up. If no backed up data selections exist in the storage pool, use the instructions in the PureDisk Backup Operator's Guide to create one or more data selections and back them up to the storage pool. 4 Create a PureDisk policy to export data to NetBackup. For information about how to create an export to NetBackup policy, see the following: See Creating or editing an export to NetBackup policy on page 85. Creating or editing an export to NetBackup policy The export process copies the data selections to NetBackup, but it leaves the data on the content routers intact. You can have multiple export policies, but because the export is a single stream, only one export can occur at a time. The following paragraphs explain how PureDisk manages export jobs:

86 86 Exporting data to NetBackup Creating or editing an export to NetBackup policy You can create multiple PureDisk export policies for a single NetBackup export engine. PureDisk runs one export job per export policy at a time. If you have two or more PureDisk export policies, these policies can send data to the same NetBackup DataStore policy. However, you are not limited to only one NetBackup DataStore policy. You can have multiple NetBackup DataStore policies. PureDisk can run multiple export jobs simultaneously from multiple NetBackup export engines if the data originated on two or more PureDisk clients. However, if the export jobs work with data that originated from a single PureDisk client, PureDisk runs the jobs one at a time. Use the following procedure to create a PureDisk policy that can export Files and Folders data selections to NetBackup. To create an Export to NetBackup policy 1 Click Manage > Policies. 2 In the left pane, under DataManagementPolicies, click ExporttoNetBackup. 3 Complete one of the following steps: To create a policy, in the right pane click Create Policy. To edit a policy, expand Export to NetBackup and click a policy name. 4 Complete the General tab. See Completing the General tab for an Export to NetBackup policy on page Complete the Data Selections tab. See Completing the Data Selections tab for an Export to NetBackup policy on page Complete the Scheduling tab. See Completing the Scheduling tab for an Export to NetBackup policy on page Complete the Parameters tab. See Completing the Parameters tab for an Export to NetBackup policy on page Complete the Metadata tab. See (Optional) Completing the Metadata tab for an Export to NetBackup policy on page Click Add when done.

87 Exporting data to NetBackup Creating or editing an export to NetBackup policy 87 Completing the General tab for an Export to NetBackup policy Use the following procedure to complete the General tab. To complete the General tab 1 Type a name for this policy in the Policy Name field. 2 Select Enabled or Disabled. This setting lets you control whether PureDisk runs the policy according to the schedule that you specify in the Scheduling tab. The following situations illustrate how the settings might be used: If you select Enabled, PureDisk runs the policy according to the schedule. This selection is the default. If you select Disabled, PureDisk does not run the policy according to the schedule. One example of how to use Disabled is when you want to prevent this policy from running during a system maintenance period. However, you do not want to enter information in the Scheduling tab to suspend and reenable this policy. 3 (Optional) Specify escalation times and actions. PureDisk can notify you if a backup does not complete within a specified time. For example, you can configure PureDisk to send an message to an individual if a backup policy workflow does not complete in an hour. Select times in the Escalatewarningafter or the Escalateerrorandterminate after drop-down boxes to specify the elapsed time. If the policy workflow does not complete before the warning timeout (6 hours is the default value), PureDisk generates a warning message. If the policy workflow does not complete before the error timeout, PureDisk generates an error message and terminates the job. The default value for the error timeout is five days. Do not set the time values low if the backup policy pertains to agents that have to back up a large number of files. For example, on a system with 1.5 million files, the scan step of a backup job typically takes 6 hours to complete. The amounts of time required needed for the other steps are more difficult to predict. They depend on the actual number of files that need to be uploaded. In addition to selecting escalation times, you need to create a policy escalation action and an event escalation action. These escalation actions define the message, define its recipients, and associate the escalation action with the policy. For information about policy escalation actions and event escalation actions, see the PureDisk Backup Operator s Guide.

88 88 Exporting data to NetBackup Creating or editing an export to NetBackup policy Completing the Data Selections tab for an Export to NetBackup policy If you specify more than one data selection, PureDisk exports each Files and Folders data selection as a separate job. Use the following procedure to complete this tab. To complete the Data Selections tab 1 Expand the tree and select one or more data selections. PureDisk displays the Files and Folders data selections. To specify a number of data selections, select a storage pool or department. This action selects all data selections that exist under the storage pool or department. PureDisk associates a data selection with a client. When you save the policy, PureDisk applies it to all specified data selections and the associated clients. If you do not select at least one Files and Folders data selection, PureDisk backs up all data selections in the storage pool. If you do not select at least one item in the tree, PureDisk does not save the filter. 2 Select Include all data selections selected above. 3 (Optional) Select Apply all inclusion rules below to data selections selected above. Use one of the following filter methods: Fill in the Data selection name or Data selection description fields with characters and wild cards (* and?). This method filters the data selections based on their names or their descriptions. For example, assume that the following data selection names exist and are selected under a department in the tree: U_*.jpg_files W_*.jpg_files W_*.xls_files If you type *files in the Data selection name field, the policy backs up all three data selections. If you type W* in the field, the data selections for this policy include only the data selections that are named W_*.jpg_files and W_*.xls_files. For more information about filtering, see the following: See the PureDisk Backup Operator s Guide. (Conditional) Select a template from the Dataselectionsbasedontemplate drop-down box to specify an existing data selection template to use.

89 Exporting data to NetBackup Creating or editing an export to NetBackup policy 89 This template applies to Files and Folders data selections only. The data selection uses the data selection rules from the template. These rules determine the files and directories to back up. You can select any data selection that you previously applied to the client. Completing the Scheduling tab for an Export to NetBackup policy Use the following procedure to complete this tab. To complete the Scheduling tab 1 Select hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly to specify how frequently you want this policy to run. PureDisk runs the policy at the time you specify in the storage pool s time zone. 2 Select the schedule details. Base your selections on the frequency that you specified in the previous step. Completing the Parameters tab for an Export to NetBackup policy The following section explains how to complete this tab. To complete the Parameters tab 1 In the NetBackup Policy Name field, specify the name of the NetBackup DataStore policy. For more information about configuring NetBackup to accept PureDisk data selections, see the following: See Configuring NetBackup to receive data exported from PureDisk on page In the PureDisk to NetBackup export engine field, select the PureDisk node where you installed the NetBackup client and the PureDisk NetBackup export engine. The node appears on the drop-down list. (Optional) Completing the Metadata tab for an Export to NetBackup policy Use the following procedure to complete this tab if you want to exclude certain files from the export. If you want to export entire data selections, do not specify anything on this tab.

90 90 Exporting data to NetBackup Creating or editing an export to NetBackup policy To complete the Metadata tab 1 Click Add to define a metadata inclusion rule for the policy. You can specify any or all filters. A file must fulfill all of the specified rules before PureDisk includes the file in the data selection. 2 In Rule name, type a name for this filter. Tip: Use a U or a W as the first character in the filter name. It helps you to identify whether the filter is for a UNIX or a Windows client. 3 In Folder name, type the complete path or a pattern of the folder where the files reside. Tip: You can use characters and wildcards to specify both absolute folder patterns and relative folder patterns. 4 In File name field, type a pattern that describes the files. For more information and examples about filtering, see the PureDisk Backup Operator's Guide. 5 In Size, use the drop-down lists to specify a filter. Base the choice on the size of the file. For example: You can select a file size that is greater than or equal to 100 bytes and less than or equal to 500 bytes. In this case, PureDisk includes files that are from 100 bytes to 500 bytes. You can select a file size that is less than or equal to 500 bytes. In this case, PureDisk includes files that are from 1 byte to 500 bytes in length. You can select a file size that is greater than or equal to 100 bytes. In this case, PureDisk includes files that are 100 bytes or longer. 6 In Last Modification, use the drop-down lists to specify a filter. Base this choice on the time the file was last modified. Select a date-based or time-based boundary. For example, if you specify January 20, 2009, in the Before field, the filter includes all files that were modified before 12:01 AM on January 20, The filter includes the files that were modified any time of day on January 19, Click OK.

91 Exporting data to NetBackup Running an export to NetBackup policy 91 Caution: The filters in the Metadata tab of an Export to NetBackup policy let you narrow the list of files that you want PureDisk to export. If you do not define filters, PureDisk exports all the files. When you specify filters in an Export to NetBackup policy, you might encounter occasional problems when you browse files in NetBackup Backup and Restore interface. The problems can occur with the NetBackup images that PureDisk creates. If you do not find your exported files when you use NetBackup's Backup and Restore interface, use the bplist(1m) NetBackup command line utility. To edit or delete a metadata inclusion rule 1 Select a rule. 2 Select Edit and make changes to the filter rule, or select Remove. Running an export to NetBackup policy The export to NetBackup policy runs according to the schedule that you specified in the PureDisk policy when you created it. The following procedure explains how to run the policy one time for a point-in-time export. To complete this procedure, you must have PureDisk restore permissions. To run an export to NetBackup policy one time 1 Click Manage > Policies. 2 In the left pane, under Data Management Policies, expand Export to NetBackup. 3 Select the policy you want to run. 4 In the right pane, click Run Policy. The PureDisk Backup Operator s Guide explains how to enable policy escalation actions and how to monitor policy runs. NetBackup writes log files of its activity to /usr/openv/netbackup/logs/pdexport. Performing a point-in-time export to NetBackup Use the following procedure to perform a one-time export of a backed up PureDisk Files and Folders data selection to NetBackup. If you use this method, you still need to define a NetBackup DataStore policy. However, you do not need a PureDisk export to NetBackup policy with this method.

92 92 Exporting data to NetBackup Troubleshooting export job failures To perform a point-in-time export to NetBackup 1 Verify that you have a NetBackup DataStore policy defined. See Configuring NetBackup to receive data exported from PureDisk on page Click Manage > Agents. 3 In the left pane, expand the tree to display the data selection that you want to export. 4 Select the data selection that you want to export. 5 In the right pane, click Export Whole Data Selection. 6 Specify the following information in the Export files from agent dialog box: Date Time NetBackup Policy Name PureDisk to NetBackup Export Engine The date when the data selection to be exported to NetBackup was backed up. The time when the data selection to be exported to NetBackup was backed up. Specify the name of the NetBackup DataStore policy. Select the PureDisk NetBackup export engine in your storage pool that you want to use to perform the export. 7 Click Export files. Caution: If the export job finds no backups that match the date specified, the job runs and shows successful completion, but PureDisk exports nothing to NetBackup. This behavior differs from the behavior for regular backups because regular backups fail if nothing is backed up. Troubleshooting export job failures The following information can be helpful in troubleshooting NetBackup export jobs: See NetBackup export engine log files on page 93. See Problems with inactive server agents on page 93.

93 Exporting data to NetBackup Troubleshooting export job failures 93 NetBackup export engine log files To enable logging for NetBackup export jobs, change the configuration file settings. The following procedure explains the configuration file fields to change. For general information about how to edit configuration files, see the following: See About the configuration files on page 321. To enable logging 1 Click Settings > Configuration > Configuration File Templates > PureDisk Server Agent > Default ValueSet for PureDisk Server Agent > debug > logging. Set logging to either info (default), debug, or trace. 2 Click Settings > Configuration > Configuration File Templates > PureDisk Server Agent > Default ValueSet for PureDisk Server Agent > debug > trace. The trace field specifies the directory to which PureDisk writes the log file. The default is /Storage/log. Edit the trace field to specify an alternative directory. Problems with inactive server agents PureDisk cannot run any job that originates from a node with an inactive server agent. If you have more than one NetBackup export engine, and an export job fails to run, ensure that all appropriate server nodes are active. Specifically, PureDisk cannot run an export job if all of the following conditions exist when you start the job: You installed two or more NetBackup export engines on different PureDisk nodes. PureDisk lets you install more than one NetBackup export engine in a storage pool. However, if the following three conditions also exist, an export job fails. The server agent on one of the nodes that hosts a NetBackup export engine is inactive. You have export policies for each of the NetBackup export engines. Each export policy exports the same data selection. In this situation, PureDisk cannot run the policies to export that specific data selection. Even the export jobs that are scheduled to run on nodes with active server agents fail to run. The server agent must always be active in order for PureDisk to run jobs for that node. However, in this scenario, an inactive server agent can affect the scheduled jobs on an active server agent.

94 94 Exporting data to NetBackup Copying or deleting an export to NetBackup policy To avoid this situation, ensure that each server agent on each node that hosts a NetBackup export engine is activated. To activate a server agent 1 Click Settings > Topology. 2 Expand the tree in the left pane so that it shows all the PureDisk services. 3 Select the service you want to start. For example, select NBU Export Engine. 4 In the right pane, click Activate NetBackup Export Engine. Copying or deleting an export to NetBackup policy The following procedure explains how to copy or delete a policy that exports data to NetBackup. To edit, copy, or delete a policy 1 Click Manage > Policies. 2 In the tree pane, expand Data Management Policies > Export to NetBackup. 3 Select a policy. 4 In the right pane, click the action you want to perform. Select from one of the following: Delete Policy. Copy Policy. A copy of the policy appears in the tree. The policy is in the disabled state. Restoring from NetBackup NetBackup treats PureDisk data selections as if they were regular NetBackup files. During the export process, NetBackup creates catalog information. The NetBackup catalog is a record of files and the names of the clients upon which the files originated. When you export data from PureDisk to NetBackup, the client name that NetBackup uses is the name of the client upon which the files originated. Example 1. Figure 4-1 shows an export policy on node_3 that exports data from speedy to NetBackup. In NetBackup, the client name that appears in the NetBackup catalog is speedy.

95 Exporting data to NetBackup Restoring from NetBackup 95 Example 2. If you replicate a data selection and then export that data selection from the destination storage pool, the destination storage pool displays the source client's name. The source client's name appears in the following format: [R] client_name (agx,stpy) In the preceding client name format, the following are replaced: client_name is the name of the client. x is the agent identifier. y is the storage pool identifier. When you export a replicated data selection from the destination storage pool to NetBackup, NetBackup removes the [R] characters at the beginning, the agent ID at the end, and the storage pool ID at the end. For example, assume the following series of events: You have two storage pools: my_spa and your_spa. A client named clienta is attached to my_spa. You replicate clienta's backed-up data selections from my_spa to your_spa. If you look at your_spa's Web UI, clienta appears as follows: [R] clienta (ag5,stp123). You configure your_spa as a NetBackup client. You export clienta's data selections from your_spa to NetBackup. You restore clienta's data selections from NetBackup. When you want to restore the data selections from clienta, look for a client named clienta in the NetBackup interface. The NetBackup job monitor displays the name of the node that hosts the PureDisk NetBackup export engine and the NetBackup client. In Figure 4-1, the name that appears in the job monitor depends on which export engine did the export. The name is node_1 or node_3. In the NetBackup catalog, the NetBackup policy that exports data from PureDisk to NetBackup is called a PureDisk-Export policy. The policy type number is 38. For more information about how to restore files from NetBackup, see the following: See the NetBackup Administrator s Guide, Volume I.

96 96 Exporting data to NetBackup Restoring to a PureDisk client that is not a NetBackup client Restoring to a PureDisk client that is not a NetBackup client The following procedure uses general terms to describe how to restore files from NetBackup. This procedure assumes that you have not installed the NetBackup client software on the PureDisk client. To restore the files to the PureDisk environment 1 Log on to the PureDisk node that hosts the NetBackup client software. If more than one node hosts NetBackup client software, log on to the node to which you want to write the files. 2 Create a restore directory. For example: # mkdir restoredir 3 From the NetBackup administration console, use the NetBackup Backup, Archive, and Restore interface to perform a client-redirected restore. The client-redirected restore is needed for the following reasons: You can restore only to a system that hosts a NetBackup client. The name of the NetBackup client appears in the NetBackup catalog. Note that it is not the PureDisk client. Refer to Figure 4-1. This example shows that the clients speedy and kwiek appear in the NetBackup catalog. More information on how to enable a client-redirected restore is available. See the NetBackup Administrator s Guide, Volume I. For example, assume the following: The PureDisk environment is depicted in Figure 4-1. The name of the NetBackup policy that performed the export was PDExport. The name of the NetBackup master server is NBUMasterServer. You want to write the files to their original location on the PureDisk node that is defined as the PureDisk NetBackup export engine (node_3). This location was /bin/myfiles. More information about restoring files to an alternate directory. See the NetBackup Administrator s Guide, Volume I

97 Exporting data to NetBackup Restoring to a PureDisk client that is also a NetBackup client 97 4 Use a network method to move the files from the PureDisk node with the NetBackup client software to the PureDisk client that needs the files. For example, you can use FTP to transfer the file. This step writes the files to the client, but it does not put the files under PureDisk control. Perform the next step if you want to use PureDisk to back up the files again, which puts them under PureDisk control. 5 (Optional) Use PureDisk to back up the files. This step puts the files back into the PureDisk environment. More information on how to perform a backup is available. See the PureDisk Backup Operator s Guide. Restoring to a PureDisk client that is also a NetBackup client The following procedure uses general terms to describe how to restore files from NetBackup. This procedure assumes that you have installed the NetBackup client software on the PureDisk client. To restore the files to the PureDisk environment 1 Log on to NetBackup. 2 From the NetBackup administration console, use the NetBackup Backup, Archive, and Restore interface to perform a restore directly to the client. 3 (Optional) Use PureDisk to back up the files. This step puts the files back into the PureDisk environment. More information on how to perform a backup is available. See the PureDisk Backup Operator s Guide.

98 98 Exporting data to NetBackup Restoring to a PureDisk client that is also a NetBackup client

99 Chapter 5 Disaster recovery backup procedures This chapter includes the following topics: About disaster recovery backup procedures About performing disaster recovery backups About backing up your PureDisk environment using NetBackup Configuring PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies About backing up your PureDisk environment using scripts Troubleshooting a disaster recovery backup About disaster recovery backup procedures A disaster recovery backup protects the data in your PureDisk environment. You can back up your storage pool data to NetBackup, to a Samba share, or to a third-party product. The PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies protect the following types of PureDisk data: The backup data on the content routers. The content routers are the repository for backup files. The spool area. This area is the buffer in which PureDisk stores data before it writes the data to the content routers. The PureDisk databases on the content routers, the metabase servers, the metabase engines, and the storage pool authority. Most PureDisk services have their own database, and there is one database management system that controls all the service databases.

100 100 Disaster recovery backup procedures About performing disaster recovery backups The PureDisk software configuration on the content routers, the metabase servers, the metabase engines, and the storage pool authority. For information on disaster recovery backups, see the following: See About performing disaster recovery backups on page 100. See About backing up your PureDisk environment using NetBackup on page 101. See About backing up your PureDisk environment using scripts on page 114. See Configuring PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies on page 106. In addition to the preceding disaster recovery backup methods, PureDisk includes Storage Pool Authority Replication (SPAR). SPAR replicates storage pool configuration information from one all-in-one storage pool to another. For information about SPAR, see the following: See About storage pool authority replication (SPAR) on page 199. If you need to recover from a disaster, use the PureDisk disaster recovery script, DR_Restore_all.sh. The disaster recovery method is the same regardless of which disaster recovery backup method you used. For information about the recovery process, see the following: See About restoring an unclustered PureDisk environment on page 121. See About restoring a clustered PureDisk environment on page 157. Note: To recover PureDisk when you have enabled the PureDisk deduplication option (PDDO), see the PureDisk Deduplication Option Guide. It contains PDDO-specific information, which includes how to avoid a potential data loss situation. About performing disaster recovery backups Depending on your backup method, the disaster recovery backup process is as follows: If you use NetBackup, PureDisk uses NetBackup backup policies to copy the data to NetBackup storage. This method requires that you install NetBackup client software on each node in the storage pool. See About backing up your PureDisk environment using NetBackup on page 101. If you use a script, PureDisk calls the script that you provide. You can use one of the following methods:

101 Disaster recovery backup procedures About backing up your PureDisk environment using NetBackup 101 You can write your own backup script. You can use one of the scripts that PureDisk includes. You can also modify one of these scripts. You can write a script that invokes a third-party backup product. See About backing up your PureDisk environment using scripts on page 114. When the disaster recovery backup policy runs, it preserves all data that you need to restore a PureDisk environment in the event of a disaster. A disaster recovery backup ensures that you can return your environment to its previous state. The following processes occur when the disaster recovery policy runs: It backs up the metadata in the storage pool. This backup includes the following data: Storage pool authority database The database(s) for the metabase engines The topology files It backs up the database on the content routers. It creates a list of files in the spool area. For an incremental backup, it also creates a list of changed files and new files on the content router. An incremental backup backs up new or changed content router data from the last full backup. Your last full backup must be available for incremental backups. It backs up the client data by using the backup method you specify. Client data includes the spool area, the new files, and the changed files on the content routers. It backs up the configuration files on all nodes. About backing up your PureDisk environment using NetBackup When you use NetBackup to perform PureDisk disaster recovery backups, you first need to create a NetBackup backup policy. PureDisk uses its own system policies to send the data to NetBackup. You can restore the data back to PureDisk by using the PureDisk disaster recovery scripts. The following sections describe how to use NetBackup to back up your PureDisk environment.

102 102 Disaster recovery backup procedures About backing up your PureDisk environment using NetBackup Prerequisites for NetBackup disaster recovery backups Verify that your environment includes the following: A separately mounted partition named /Storage. The separate mounting enables high performance and is a requirement for disaster recovery backups. A network connection between every PureDisk node and a NetBackup environment. The NetBackup environment must be running NetBackup server software at the 6.0 MP5 release level or greater. A NetBackup client software package at the 6.0 MP5 release level or greater. Install this client software on every PureDisk node in the storage pool. Note: Make sure that the NetBackup client software version number is the same as the NetBackup environment version number. For more information about how to install the software, see the following: See Configuring the NetBackup client software on page 102. Configuring the NetBackup client software The following procedure explains how to configure NetBackup client software. To configure the NetBackup client software 1 Install the NetBackup Linux SUSE 2.6 client on each node in your PureDisk storage pool. If the storage pool is clustered, install the client on all nodes, including the passive node. For general information about how to install the NetBackup client, see the NetBackup Installation Guide for UNIX and Linux. When you install the client software, use the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) for the client name. For example, answer n to the following short name prompt: Would you like to use "my_pdnode" as the configured name of the NetBackup client? [y,n] (y) n Enter the name of the NetBackup client: my_pdnode.my_domain.com If you accept the short name during the install, edit the /usr/openv/netbackup/bp.conf file on each node and change the line that identifies the client. For example:

103 Disaster recovery backup procedures About backing up your PureDisk environment using NetBackup 103 CLIENT_NAME=my_pdnode.my_domain.com 2 (Conditional) For each PureDisk node, create a file for the host FQDN and another file for the service FQDN in the altnames directory on the NetBackup master server. Perform this step if the storage pool you want to back up is clustered. This step is needed because the bp.conf file on each node contains the physical host address. However, the backup process and the restore process use the service address. If necessary, create the altnames directory itself. Within the directory, create a file of the following format for each node: xxxxnode1.symc.be Create these files for each node in the PureDisk storage pool. Example 1. To create the altnames directory on a UNIX master server, type the following command: # mkdir /usr/openv/netbackup/db/altnames Example 2. Assume that you want to create file names in the altnames directory for the nodes in the following two-node cluster: Node 1 = allinone.acme.com (host FQDN) and allinones.acme.com (service FQDN) Node 2 = passive.acme.com (host FQDN) and passives.acme.com (service FQDN) To create a file in the altnames directory of a UNIX master server, you type the following commands: # touch allinone.acme.com # touch allinones.acme.com # touch passive.acme.com # touch passives.acme.com

104 104 Disaster recovery backup procedures About backing up your PureDisk environment using NetBackup For information about the altnames directory and creating files inside the altnames directory, see the NetBackup Administrator s Guide, Volume I. 3 Verify that the xinetd daemon is running on each node. This service ensures proper communication between the NetBackup master server and the Linux client. Type the following command to determine if xinetd is running: # ps -aef grep xinetd If it is not running, enter the following command: # /etc/init.d/xinetd start If you restart the system, type the following command to ensure that the xinetd daemon starts: # /sbin/insserv /etc/init.d/xinetd Enabling NetBackup for PureDisk backups The procedure in this topic uses general terms to describe how to create NetBackup policies for backing up PureDisk data. For more information about the specific tasks you need to perform when you create these policies, see the following: See the NetBackup Administrator s Guide, Volume I. To enable NetBackup to back up a PureDisk storage pool 1 Make sure that you have accurate topology and node identification information for this storage pool. This information might be needed during a disaster recovery. Make sure that the information on the cluster planning spreadsheet (for clustered storage pools) or on the installation worksheets (for unclustered storage pools) is accurate. 2 Log on to the NetBackup administration console. 3 Create a NetBackup Standard policy with a user backup schedule. This policy is for the PureDisk content router and spool area data. When you create the NetBackup policies, note the following rules: Observe the NetBackup policy naming rules.

105 Disaster recovery backup procedures About backing up your PureDisk environment using NetBackup 105 For information about NetBackup policy names, see the following: See About NetBackup policy names on page 106. Remember the name of these NetBackup policies. You specify these names again when you create the PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies. When you create the NetBackup Standard policy, use the same FQDN for the client that you specified when you installed the client. For example, use my_pdnode.my_domain.com to identify the client. The client name must appear identically in the NetBackup policy and in the bp.conf file on the PureDisk node. Make sure that all PureDisk nodes are included in the client list in the NetBackup Standard policy. If the storage pool is clustered, specify the node service FQDN in the NetBackup Standard policy. Do not specify the host address. If your PureDisk environment is set up with /Storage mounted on an NFS share, make sure to check the option Follow NFS in the NetBackup Standard policy definition. Entries are not required on the NetBackup Backup Selections tab. Make sure that the schedule allows backups 24 hours a day and seven days a week. This method allows PureDisk to send data to NetBackup at any time. 4 Create a NetBackup DataStore policy with an application backup schedule. This policy is for the PureDisk metadata. Observe the same naming rules regarding NetBackup policies, FQDNs, and so on as described in the following: See About NetBackup policy names on page 106. Make sure that all PureDisk nodes are included in the client list in the NetBackup DataStore policy. 5 Use the PureDisk Web UI to edit the following policies: The System policy for full DR backup The System policy for incremental DR backup PureDisk includes these policies by default. When you edit these policies, enable them, specify information specific to your site, and optionally, create policy escalation actions for them. Make sure that all PureDisk nodes are included in the client list in the NetBackup DataStore policy. For more information about how to create PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies, see the following: See Configuring PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies on page 106.

106 106 Disaster recovery backup procedures Configuring PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies About NetBackup policy names The PureDisk Web UI does not verify that the policy names you enter comply with the NetBackup naming conventions. As a consequence, you can possibly enter a policy name in the disaster recovery backup policy that is not valid for NetBackup. Avoid this situation. NetBackup enforces the following naming conventions for its policies: Policy names cannot start with a dash (-). Policy names cannot include space characters. Policy names cannot include the characters # * & ^ Configuring PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies PureDisk includes the following disaster recovery backup policies: A full disaster recovery backup policy, which backs up the entire storage pool. An incremental disaster recovery backup policy, which backs up the information that changed since the last full or incremental backup ran. You might need to experiment with your disaster recovery backup policy schedules for both full backups and incremental backups. A full backup takes longer to complete than an incremental backup. For example, you might run a full disaster recovery backup one time each week. You might run incremental disaster recovery backups on the other days of the week. The exact schedule depends on several factors: How much data is in your storage pool How frequently you need to restore data How quickly you need to restore data The following procedure explains how to enable the backup policies.

107 Disaster recovery backup procedures Configuring PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies 107 To enable PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies 1 Log on to the storage pool and start the Web UI. 2 Verify that you configured NetBackup or scripts to back up your PureDisk storage pool. Make sure that one of these backup structures is in place before you enable the PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies. For more information about how to create backups, see the following: See About backing up your PureDisk environment using NetBackup on page 101. See About backing up your PureDisk environment using scripts on page Click Manage > Policies. 4 In the left pane, under Storage Pool Management Policies, expand Disaster Recovery Backup. 5 Select one of the following policies: System policy for full DR backup System policy for incremental DR backup The procedures for enabling these policies are identical. In addition, the tabs and fields in the Web UI are the same for each of these policy types. These policies differ only in the type of backup that PureDisk runs when you enable them. 6 Complete the General tab. See Completing the General tab for a disaster recovery backup policy on page Complete the Scheduling tab. See Completing the Scheduling tab for a disaster recovery backup policy on page Complete the Parameters tab. See Completing the Parameters tab for a disaster recovery backup policy on page Click Save when done.

108 108 Disaster recovery backup procedures Configuring PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies 10 (Optional) Create a policy escalation action for this policy. The policy escalation action defines the event escalation message and its recipients. Make sure to associate the escalation action with the policy. For more information, see the PureDisk Backup Operator's Guide. 11 (Optional) Repeat the preceding steps to configure the other policy type. For example, after you configured a System policy for full DR backup, repeat the preceding steps but select System policy for incremental DR backup. Completing the General tab for a disaster recovery backup policy The following procedure explains how to complete the General tab. To complete the General tab 1 (Optional) Type a new name for this policy in the Name field. Perform this step only if you want to rename this policy. 2 Select Enabled or Disabled. This setting lets you control whether PureDisk runs the policy according to the Scheduling tab, as in the following situations: If you select Enabled, PureDisk runs the policy according to the schedule. After you enable a policy, you can run the policy on a schedule or manually. If you select Disabled, PureDisk does not run the policy according to the schedule. If a policy is disabled, PureDisk cannot run the policy according to a schedule, and you cannot run the policy manually. This selection is the default. For example, if you want to stop running the policy during a system maintenance period select Disabled. You do not need to enter information in the Scheduling tab to suspend and later reenable the policy. 3 (Optional) Select times in the Escalate warning after or the Escalate error and terminate after drop-down lists. These times specify the elapsed time before PureDisk sends an message. PureDisk can notify you if a backup does not complete within a specified time. These fields allow you to define the times for escalation actions. For example, you can configure PureDisk to send an message to an administrator if the policy does not complete in eight hours.

109 Disaster recovery backup procedures Configuring PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies 109 Completing the Scheduling tab for a disaster recovery backup policy The disaster recovery backup policy runs according to the schedule you specify when you edit the policy. The first time you run a disaster recovery backup policy, PureDisk performs a full backup. By definition, subsequent disaster recovery backups are incremental backups. See Configuring PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies on page 106. The following procedure explains how to complete this tab. To complete the Scheduling tab Select hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly schedule to specify how frequently you want this policy to run. You can also specify an exact start time to run the schedule. The following are additional notes on scheduling disaster recovery backups: Symantec recommends that you run disaster recovery backups when other backups are not running. You can run a disaster recovery backup at the same time that regular system backups run. However, you cannot restore the data you backed up during the regular system backup. When you run a full disaster recovery backup, content router performance degrades. This issue is due to increased file system activity. In extreme cases, a full backup can cause regular backup jobs to fail. Schedule full backups during a time when other backups are not running. You can customize the schedule to suit your site s needs. You can experiment with different schedules. You want to balance the frequency with which this policy runs and system resource usage. If you want to run the policy only one time, select an active policy and click Run Policy from the left pane. After the policy runs, open the General tab again and disable the policy. If you do not disable the policy, it runs again according to the schedule that you specified in the Scheduling tab. If you use NetBackup as your backup tool, make sure that you schedule the PureDisk backup policies to run during NetBackup s open window. Symantec recommends that you specify the NetBackup schedule to allow backups 24 hours a day and seven days a week. Completing the Parameters tab for a disaster recovery backup policy This tab is divided into three sections. Each represents one of the three possible methods you can use to back up your PureDisk data.

110 110 Disaster recovery backup procedures Configuring PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies Note: Choose only one method to back up your PureDisk data (NetBackup, Samba Share, or Third Party Product). Then, complete all of the information fields for that method. Do not complete any fields for the methods that you do not choose. To choose a disaster recovery backup method Choose one of the following disaster recovery backup methods and follow the procedure associated with that backup method: NetBackup. For information about how to complete the Parameters tab for a NetBackup backup, see the following: See Completing the Parameters tab on a Disaster recovery policy to back up PureDisk to a NetBackup environment on page 110. Samba. For information about how to complete the Parameters tab for a NetBackup backup, see the following: See Completing the Parameters tab on a Disaster recovery policy to back up PureDisk to a Samba file system on page 111. Third party. For information about how to complete the Parameters tab for a NetBackup backup, see the following: See Completing the Parameters tab on a Disaster recovery policy to back up PureDisk to a third-party product on page 112. Completing the Parameters tab on a Disaster recovery policy to back up PureDisk to a NetBackup environment The following procedure explains how to complete the Parameters tab to back up PureDisk to a NetBackup environment. Make sure you are familiar with how to create NetBackup policies. For information about how to create NetBackup policies, see the NetBackup Administrator s Guide, Volume I. The following procedure describes how to use NetBackup to back up PureDisk data. To use NetBackup to back up PureDisk 1 Select Use NetBackup. 2 In the Standard Policy field, type the name of the NetBackup standard policy that you configured to back up this data. 3 In the DataStore Policy field, type the name of the NetBackup DataStore policy that you configured to back up this data.

111 Disaster recovery backup procedures Configuring PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies In the Number of Parallel streams drop-down list, select the number of parallel streams that you specified when you created the NetBackup Standard policy. 5 Click Save. Completing the Parameters tab on a Disaster recovery policy to back up PureDisk to a Samba file system The following procedure describes how to complete the Parameters tab to back up PureDisk data to a Samba file system on another computer. To use a Samba share to back up PureDisk 1 Make sure that Samba is configured on the computer to which you want to write the PureDisk backups. 2 Select Use Samba Share. 3 In the Full path of data backup program field, specify the full path and the name of the backup script that you want to use. The /opt/pdconfigure/scripts/support/dr_backupsamplescripts/ directory contains sample disaster recovery backup scripts. Symantec recommends that you use the following scripts: full_dr_backup.sh incremental_dr_backup.sh 4 In the Directory Path Name field, specify the full path (mount point) to a directory in which to write the backed up files. Specify /DRdata in this field if the following are both true: You used the full_dr_backup.sh script or the incremental_dr_backup.sh script. You did not modify the scripts. These scripts write to /DRdata. The write occurs even if the directory is mounted to another disk or partition. The script mounts to the directory you specify and writes to it. Specify your own directory in this field if either of the following are true: You do not use the full_dr_backup.sh script or the incremental_dr_backup.sh script. You modified the scripts to write to a different directory. Make sure that your backup scripts write to the directory you specify. PureDisk does not mount this directory.

112 112 Disaster recovery backup procedures Configuring PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies 5 In the Share Name field, specify the name of a remote Samba shared file system. Use the following format for the shared file system: //hostname/sharename These variables are as follows: hostname sharename Specify the host name or IP address upon which the target shared directory resides. Specify the name of the shared directory on hostname. For example: // /pde_dr_files 6 In the Workgroup / Domain field, specify the domain name. 7 In the User Name field, specify the Samba user name. 8 In the Password field, specify the Samba password. 9 Select UseEncryption to have PureDisk encrypt the configuration data before it writes the data. Use Encryption does not cause segment data to be automatically encrypted. 10 Click Save. 11 (Conditional) Update or verify the storage pool s topology information. Perform this step if you selected Use Encryption in the previous step. If you perform the backup with encryption enabled, make sure that you have accurate topology and node identification information. This information is needed during a disaster recovery. Make sure that the information on the cluster planning spreadsheet (for clustered storage pools) or on the installation worksheets (for unclustered storage pools) is accurate. Click Settings > Topology to examine the storage pool's topology. Completing the Parameters tab on a Disaster recovery policy to back up PureDisk to a third-party product The following procedure describes how to complete the Parameters tab to back up PureDisk data to a third-party product.

113 Disaster recovery backup procedures Configuring PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies 113 Caution: If you choose this method, be aware that you need to copy your backups to a secondary host. If the primary host fails, you are likely to lose both the original files and the backed up files that are written to the local directory. To use a third-party product to back up PureDisk 1 Select Use Third Party Product. 2 In the Full path of data backup program field, specify the full path and the name of the backup script you want to use. The /opt/pdconfigure/scripts/support/dr_backupsamplescripts/ directory contains sample disaster recovery backup scripts. Symantec recommends you use the following scripts: full_dr_backup.sh incremental_dr_backup.sh 3 In the Directory Path Name field, specify the full path to the directory in which to write the backed up files. If you modified or did not use the full_dr_backup.sh script or the incremental_dr_backup.sh script, specify your own directory in this field. If you used the full_dr_backup.sh script or the incremental_dr_backup.sh script and did not modify them, specify /DRdata in this field. These scripts write to /DRdata. The write occurs even if the directory is mounted to another disk or partition. The script mounts to the directory you specify and writes to it. 4 Select UseEncryption to have PureDisk encrypt the configuration data before it writes the data. Use Encryption does not cause segment data to be automatically encrypted. 5 Click Save. 6 (Conditional) Update or verify the storage pool s topology information. Perform this step if you selected Use Encryption in the previous step. If you perform the backup with encryption enabled, make sure that you have accurate topology and node identification information. This information is needed during a disaster recovery. Make sure that the information on the cluster planning spreadsheet (for clustered storage pools) or on the installation worksheets (for unclustered storage pools) is accurate. Click Settings > Topology to examine the storage pool's topology.

114 114 Disaster recovery backup procedures About backing up your PureDisk environment using scripts About backing up your PureDisk environment using scripts The following sections discuss how to use scripts for disaster recovery. Your options are as follows: Use one of the sample scripts that PureDisk provides. Alternatively, you can customize these scripts for your own site s use. Write your own backup script. This script can invoke a third-party backup tool. Prerequisites for script-based disaster recovery backups Before you enable a disaster recovery policy, identify and create a repository for the backup files that this policy creates. The repository can be a local file system or a Samba shared file system. For example, you can back up your PureDisk environment to a file system on a server that is outside of the PureDisk environment. Such a file system must be within the Samba or shared file system. If you write to a shared file system outside of the PureDisk storage pool, make sure of the following: The server to which you want to write the PureDisk backup is connected to the network. A Samba shared file system is mounted on the computer to which you want to write the backup. The /Storage partition is mounted as a separate partition. The separate mounting enables high performance and is a requirement for disaster recovery backups. PureDisk s disaster recovery backup or restore script examples The PureDisk installation software includes example backup scripts and example restore scripts. You do not need to modify them for use at your site. However if you want to modify the scripts, examine the comments in the script files. The comments explain how to modify each one. The example scripts reside in the following directory: /opt/pdconfigure/scripts/support/dr_backupsamplescripts/

115 Disaster recovery backup procedures About backing up your PureDisk environment using scripts 115 Table 5-1 lists the scripts that are located in this directory and describes their functions. Table 5-1 Script examples Script name full_dr_backup.sh incremental_dr_backup.sh DRrestore.sh Script function Performs a full backup of PureDisk environment data. Performs an incremental backup of PureDisk environment data. Restores data about the PureDisk environment that was saved to a Samba share or was saved by a third-party product. For more information about how to restore an unclustered PureDisk environment, see the following: See About restoring an unclustered PureDisk environment on page 121. For more information about how to restore a clustered PureDisk environment, see the following: See About restoring a clustered PureDisk environment on page 157. If you modify the scripts that PureDisk provides, the scripts are not protected. During a restore procedure, PureDisk overwrites the scripts if they remain in the default installation directory (/opt). You must place them in another directory for protection (for example, in /usr or /tmp). Creating a backup script A disaster recovery backup script can back up the files directly, or it can run a third-party backup tool. The following procedure explains how to create a disaster recovery script to back up the spool, new, and changed data on the content routers. If you create your own scripts, the scripts are not protected. During a restore procedure, PureDisk overwrites the scripts if they remain in the default installation directory (/opt). You must place them in another directory for protection (for example, in /usr or /tmp).

116 116 Disaster recovery backup procedures About backing up your PureDisk environment using scripts To create a backup script 1 Use a text editor to create a backup script that backs up the data directly or calls a backup product. The backup script must perform the actual backup of the data. When you create the script, include the following options: --new listfile Used for an incremental backup. Specifies that you want to back up the new container directories that were created since the last disaster recovery backup was performed. --changed listfile Used for an incremental backup. Specifies that you want to back up the container directories that have changed since the last disaster recovery backup ran. --full listfile Used for a full backup. Specifies that you want to back up all container directories. --spool spool_files --agentid agent_id The spool area on a content router is a buffer area. It holds file data until PureDisk writes the data to the content router. Specifies the node which is to be backed up. Each node that runs this script supplies its own agent identifier. Do not create actual files for listfile or spool_files. The disaster recovery workflow creates these files and provides them to the script. If you run an incremental backup, and no full backup exists, PureDisk performs a full backup. The disaster recovery backup policy calls the script and runs it each time with a different option, in the following order: --new --changed --full Backs up newly created container directories Backs up the existing container directories that have changed Backs up both the new container directories and the existing container directories that have changed

117 Disaster recovery backup procedures Troubleshooting a disaster recovery backup spool --agentid Backs up any files in the content router s spool area Specifies the agent identification of the node that is being backed up 2 Copy the script you created to every content router in your environment. Write this script to the same location on each content router. For example, /opt/external_scripts. 3 Copy the scripts to a backup directory for protection. PureDisk overwrites the scripts during a restore, so write a copy to /usr or /tmp. Troubleshooting a disaster recovery backup The following describe how to troubleshoot failed disaster recovery backups: See Missing pdkeyutil file on page 117. See Content router modes set incorrectly on page 118. Missing pdkeyutil file The pdkeyutil command enables encrypted disaster recovery backups to a local file system or to a Samba shared file system. One possible reason for disaster recovery backup job failure is the absence of a pdkeyutil file. The installation procedure includes a step to enable this utility. If your backup failed, it might be because you did not enable this utility at installation time. If your backup fails to run, examine the job details. To examine the job details, click Monitor > Jobs. In the right pane, click the Job Id number on the row that includes the disaster recovery backup workflow job. If the pdkeyutil file does not exist, the following message appears in the Job log tab: open(/storage/var/keys/dr.key,...) failed; No such file or directory (2) To enable the pdkeyutil command, enter the following command on all active nodes:

118 118 Disaster recovery backup procedures Troubleshooting a disaster recovery backup # /opt/pdag/bin/pdkeyutil -insert The preceding command initiates a dialog session with the pdkeyutil utility. The utility prompts you to specify a password for the encryption utility to use during disaster recovery backups and restores. Remember the password that you type. You need this password to restore PureDisk storage pool authority configuration files in the event of a disaster. If you do not remember this password, you cannot complete the restore. When you perform a restore, make sure to use the password that was in effect when your disaster recovery backup ran. If you have changed the password, ensure that the password you specify is the same password that was used when the disaster recovery backup ran. To determine if the key is enabled, enter the following command: # /opt/pdag/bin/pdkeyutil -display This command displays the following if the key is enabled: Key File version: 0 Key count: 1 1. Key creation date: (current key) Key: 1bdd79b5dee3f6a e9194c This command displays the following if no key is enabled: Key File version: 0 Key count: 0 Content router modes set incorrectly After a failed disaster recovery backup, the disaster recovery backup workflow attempts to reset the content router modes back to normal. However, depending on the nature of the failure, these attempts can be unsuccessful. After a failed disaster recovery backup, perform the following procedure. To reset content router modes 1 Log into one of the content router nodes as root. 2 Type the following command: # /opt/pdcr/bin/crcontrol --getmode

119 Disaster recovery backup procedures Troubleshooting a disaster recovery backup Examine the crcontrol command's output. If the modes are set correctly, the output indicates that all modes =YES except for REROUTE mode, which should be set to =NO. The following output indicates that the modes are set correctly: Mode : GET=Yes PUT=Yes DEREF=Yes SYSTEM=Yes STORAGED=Yes REROUTE=No If the crcontrol command output for your content router is not set correctly, type the following command to set one or more modes manually: # /opt/pdcr/bin/crcontrol -mode mode=yes For mode, type one of the following: GET, PUT, DEREF, SYSTEM, or STORAGED. For example, if DEREF=Hold in your output, type the following command: # /opt/pdcr/bin/crcontrol -mode DEREF=Yes Do this for each mode that is not correctly set. 4 Repeat this procedure for each content router node in your storage pool.

120 120 Disaster recovery backup procedures Troubleshooting a disaster recovery backup

121 Chapter 6 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools This chapter includes the following topics: About restoring an unclustered PureDisk environment Reinstalling required software (unclustered recovery) Performing a disaster recovery of an unclustered PureDisk storage pool from a NetBackup disaster recovery backup (NetBackup, unclustered recovery) Performing a disaster recovery from a Samba backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) Performing a disaster recovery from a third-party product backup (third-party, unclustered recovery) About restoring an unclustered PureDisk environment Perform the procedures in this chapter when other methods to recover data have failed. No matter how frequently you have performed disaster recovery backups, data loss is possible with any restore procedure. The following introductory information introduces the PureDisk procedures that explain how to restore an unclustered PureDisk environment: See When to restore your environment on page 122. See Restore overview for an unclustered storage pool on page 122. For information about how to perform disaster recovery backups and how to create PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies, see the following: See About performing disaster recovery backups on page 100.

122 122 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools About restoring an unclustered PureDisk environment See Configuring PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies on page 106. When to restore your environment Restore your PureDisk environment when one or more of the following conditions are present: Other methods to restore an unclustered storage pool have failed. One or more of your PureDisk nodes is down. That is, the hardware does not function and cannot be repaired. Disks have crashed. One or more of the databases appears to be corrupted. To determine their state, examine the log file in the following file: /Storage/log/pddb/postgresql.log Possible signs of a corrupted database are messages such as the following in the log file: FATAL: could not open file "/Storage/databases/pddb/data/global/1262": No such file or directory LOG: could not open temporary statistics file "/Storage/databases/pddb/data/global/pgstat.tmp.4391": No such file or directory Restore overview for an unclustered storage pool Regardless of the method you used to perform the disaster recovery backup, you can use the DR_Restore_all.sh script to perform restores. The PureDisk initiates the disaster recovery restore procedure when you type the following command on the storage pool authority: /opt/pdinstall/dr_restore_all.sh The DR_Restore_all.sh script performs the following actions: Prompts for all of the information that is required to restore an entire storage pool. Restores the data that was backed up.

123 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Reinstalling required software (unclustered recovery) 123 Optimizes the content router restore. This action occurs when the disaster affected only a subset of the content routers. The DR_Restore_all.sh script fully restores the /Storage/data directory of all failed content router nodes. If the configuration includes any content routers that do not need to be fully recovered because no disaster occurred, the script performs minimal restores. The restores bring the content routers to a state that is consistent with the point in time of the last disaster recovery backup. Since the last backup was done, some data segments might have been removed or added. In these cases, the script does the following: Restores all databases and configuration files. Restores the segment containers so that they are consistent with the content router databases. Restores all segment containers that a removal job has changed or deleted since last the backup. To perform a disaster recovery of an unclustered storage pool 1 Reinstall the software on your storage pool. Perform the following procedure: See Reinstalling required software (unclustered recovery) on page Perform one of the following procedures, depending on the way you backed up your PureDisk environment. See Performing a disaster recovery of an unclustered PureDisk storage pool from a NetBackup disaster recovery backup (NetBackup, unclustered recovery) on page 133. See Performing a disaster recovery from a Samba backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) on page 138. See Performing a disaster recovery from a third-party product backup (third-party, unclustered recovery) on page 147. Reinstalling required software (unclustered recovery) Complete the following procedure to reinstall the software on the nodes that failed. For example, if a content router failed, install PDOS on that content router only.

124 124 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Reinstalling required software (unclustered recovery) Reinstalling PDOS To reinstall the software 1 Install PDOS on the nodes that failed. Perform the following procedure: See Reinstalling PDOS on page Reconfigure your storage partitions. Perform one of the following procedures: See (Conditional) Reconfiguring the storage partitions on DAS/SAN disks on page 125. See (Conditional) Reconfiguring the storage partitions on iscsi disks on page Complete the software reinstallation. Perform the following procedure: See Completing the software reinstallation on page 132. For each node that failed, install PDOS and any PDOS updates you installed onto the PDOS base release. The following procedure explains how to reinstall PDOS. To reinstall PDOS on the nodes that failed 1 Install PDOS on each failed node. Use the installation instructions in the PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide. 2 (Conditional) Install PDOS updates on each failed node. Perform this step if you installed any PDOS updates on the nodes before the disaster. Use the installation instructions in the update README file. 3 (Conditional) Perform intermediate installation tasks. Perform this step if the node has special requirements. For example, if you need to disable multipathing or if you need to configure iscsi disks for this node, perform the additional steps in the chapter called 'Preparing to configure the storage pool' in the PureDisk Storage Pool Configuration Guide. 4 Proceed to one of the following, depending on the disks attached to this node: See (Conditional) Reconfiguring the storage partitions on DAS/SAN disks on page 125.

125 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Reinstalling required software (unclustered recovery) 125 See (Conditional) Reconfiguring the storage partitions on iscsi disks on page 129. (Conditional) Reconfiguring the storage partitions on DAS/SAN disks Perform this procedure is your node uses DAS/SAN disks. The following overview procedure explains how to configure the storage partitions. To specify the storage partitions 1 Create disk groups. See Creating disk groups (DAS/SAN disks) on page Configure the /Storage partition. See Configuring the /Storage partition (DAS/SAN disks) on page (Optional) Configure the /Storage/data and /Storage/databases partition. See (Optional) Configuring the /Storage/data and the /Storage/databases partition (DAS/SAN disks) on page Complete the storage configuration. See Completing the storage configuration (DAS/SAN disks) on page 128. Creating disk groups (DAS/SAN disks) The following procedure explains how to start YaST and create disk groups. To create disk groups 1 Type the following command to launch the SUSE Linux YaST configuration tool: # yast Type yast or YaST to start the interface. Do not type other combinations of uppercase and lowercase letters. 2 In the YaST Control Center main page, select System > Partitioner. 3 Select Yes on the warning pop-up. 4 On the Expert Partitioner page, select VxVM. 5 On the Create a Disk Group pop-up, type your site-specific name for the disk group or accept the default. 6 Click OK.

126 126 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Reinstalling required software (unclustered recovery) 7 On the Veritas Volume Manager: Disks Setup page, select a disk that you want to include in the disk group. 8 Select Add Disk and press Return. You can only add disks that are not yet partitioned. If you try to add a disk with partitions, adding the disk to the disk group does not succeed. Delete all partitions from the disk before you try to add partitions. To delete all partitions on a disk, select Expert in the YaST interface and select Delete Partition Table and Disk Label. 9 Repeat the following steps for all the disks that you want to include in the disk group: Step 7 Step 8 10 Click Next. 11 Proceed to the following topic: See Configuring the /Storage partition (DAS/SAN disks) on page 126. Configuring the /Storage partition (DAS/SAN disks) The following procedure explains how to configure the /Storage partition. To configure the /Storage partition 1 On the Veritas Volume Manager: Volumes page, click Add. The Create Volume pop-up appears. 2 Decide whether you can create a VxFS file system or whether you need to create an XFS file system. A VxFS file system is the recommended default. However, you might need to configure an XFS file system if VxFS does not support your disks. Proceed as follows: If your disks support VxFS, proceed to the next step to specify a volume name. If your disks do not support VxFS, in the File System field, select XFS from the drop-down list. 3 In the Volume Name field, specify a name. For example, Storage. 4 In the Mount Point field, type /Storage. You must type this name because it is not in the drop-down list. 5 Click OK.

127 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Reinstalling required software (unclustered recovery) Click Next. 7 Proceed to one of the following topics: If you want to configure a /Storage/data or a /Storage/databases partition to enhance performance, proceed to the following: See (Optional) Configuring the /Storage/data and the /Storage/databases partition (DAS/SAN disks) on page 127. Note: In a multinode storage pool, make sure to specify the same partitioning scheme on each node. If you do not want to configure additional partitions, proceed to the following: See Completing the storage configuration (DAS/SAN disks) on page 128. (Optional) Configuring the /Storage/data and the /Storage/databases partition (DAS/SAN disks) Perform the following procedure if you want to configure a /Storage/data and a /Storage/databases partition. Symantec does not require that you configure these additional partitions, but these additional partitions can increase storage pool performance. If you configure these additional partitions, configure them in one of the following ways: Configure /Storage/data. or Configure /Storage/data and /Storage/databases. To configure a /Storage/data and a /Storage/databases partition 1 Specify a partition for /Storage/data. Perform the following steps: On the Veritas Volume Manager: Volumes page, click Add. The Create Volume pop-up appears. (Conditional) In the File System field, select XFS from the drop-down list if VxFS does not support your disk types. Make sure that you specify the same file system for all storage partitions. In the Volume Name field, specify Storage_data. In the Size field, specify the size for this partition.

128 128 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Reinstalling required software (unclustered recovery) For more information, see the PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide. In the Mount Point field, type /Storage/data. You must type this name because it is not in the drop-down list. Click OK. 2 Specify a partition for /Storage/databases. Perform the following steps: On the Veritas Volume Manager: Volumes page, click Add. The Create Volume pop-up appears. (Conditional) In the File System field, select XFS from the drop-down list if VxFS does not support your disk types. Make sure that you specify the same file system for all storage partitions. In the Volume Name field, specify Storage_databases. In the Size field, specify the size for this partition. For more information, see the PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide. In the Mount Point field, type /Storage/databases. You must type this name because it is not in the drop-down list. Click OK. 3 Click Next. 4 Proceed to the following topic: See Completing the storage configuration (DAS/SAN disks) on page 128. Completing the storage configuration (DAS/SAN disks) The following procedure explains how to finish the storage configuration. To complete the storage configuration 1 On the Expert Partitioner page, inspect the information displayed. Press the right-arrow key to display the Mount column. Make sure that the Mount column is correct. If it is not, quit YaST and attempt the storage configuration again. 2 Click the icon in the lower right-hand corner. Depending on the installation option that you used, this icon is either Apply or Finish. 3 On the Changes pop-up that appears, click Apply.

129 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Reinstalling required software (unclustered recovery) Select Finish. 5 Select Quit. (Conditional) Reconfiguring the storage partitions on iscsi disks Perform this procedure if your node uses iscsi disks. The following overview procedure explains how to configure the storage partitions. To specify the storage partitions 1 Create disk groups. See the following: See Creating disk groups (iscsi disks) on page Configure the /Storage partition. See the following: See Configuring the /Storage partition (iscsi disks) on page (Optional) Configure the /Storage/data and /Storage/databases partition. See the following: See (Optional) Configuring the /Storage/data and the /Storage/databases partitions (iscsi disks) on page Complete the storage configuration. See the following: See Completing the storage configuration (iscsi disks) on page 132. Creating disk groups (iscsi disks) The following procedure explains how to start YaST and how to create disk groups. To create disk groups 1 (Conditional) Type the following command to launch the SUSE Linux YaST configuration tool: # yast Perform this step as needed. Type yast or YaST to start the interface. Do not type other combinations of uppercase and lowercase letters. 2 In the YaST Control Center main page, select System > Partitioner and press Enter.

130 130 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Reinstalling required software (unclustered recovery) 3 Select Yes on the warning pop-up. 4 On the Expert Partitioner page, select LVM and press Enter. 5 On the Create a Volume Group pop-up, type your volume group name for the disk group or accept the default. 6 Select OK and press Enter. 7 On the Logical Volume Manager: Physical Volume Setup page, select a disk that you want to include in the disk group. 8 Select Add Volume and press Enter. 9 Repeat the following steps for all the disks that you want to include in the disk group: Step 7 Step 8 10 Select Next. 11 Proceed to the following topic: See Configuring the /Storage partition (iscsi disks) on page 130. Configuring the /Storage partition (iscsi disks) The following procedure explains how to configure the /Storage partition. To configure the /Storage partition 1 On the Logical Volume Manager: Logical Volumes page, select Add. The Create Logical Volume pop-up appears. 2 In the File System field, select XFS from the drop-down list. 3 In the Logical Volume Name field, specify a name. For example, Storage. 4 In the Size field, specify the size for this partition. For information about how to configure the size for a partition, see the PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide. 5 In the Mount Point field, type /Storage. You must type this name because it is not in the drop-down list. 6 Select OK and press Enter. 7 Select Next. 8 Proceed to one of the following:

131 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Reinstalling required software (unclustered recovery) 131 If you want to configure the /Storage/data partition and the /Storage/databases partition, proceed to the following: See (Optional) Configuring the /Storage/data and the /Storage/databases partitions (iscsi disks) on page 131. If you do not want to configure the /Storage/data partition and the /Storage/databases partition, select Next, press Enter, and proceed to the following: See Completing the storage configuration (iscsi disks) on page 132. (Optional) Configuring the /Storage/data and the /Storage/databases partitions (iscsi disks) Perform the following procedure if you want to configure a /Storage/data and a /Storage/databases partition. Symantec does not require that you configure these additional partitions, but these additional partitions can increase storage pool performance. If you configure these additional partitions, create them in one of the following ways: Create /Storage/data or Create both /Storage/data and /Storage/databases To configure a /Storage/data and a /Storage/databases partition 1 Specify a partition for /Storage/data. Perform the following steps to create a high-performance /Storage/data partition: On the Logical Volume Manager: Logical Volumes page, select Add. The Create Volume pop-up appears. In the File System field, select XFS from the drop-down list. In the Logical Volume Name field, specify Storage_data. In the Size field, specify the size for this partition. For information about how to configure the size for a partition, see the PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide. In the Mount Point field, type /Storage/data. You must type this name because it is not in the drop-down list. Select OK. 2 Specify a partition for /Storage/databases.

132 132 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Reinstalling required software (unclustered recovery) Perform the following steps to create a high-performance /Storage/databases partition: On the Logical Volume Manager: Logical Volumes page, select Add. The Create Volume pop-up appears. In the File System field, select XFS from the drop-down list. In the Logical Volume Name field, specify Storage_databases. In the Size field, specify the size for this partition. For information about how to configure the size for a partition, see the PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide. In the Mount Point field, type /Storage/databases. You must type this name because it is not in the drop-down list. Select OK. 3 Select Next. 4 Proceed to the following: See Completing the storage configuration (iscsi disks) on page 132. Completing the storage configuration (iscsi disks) The following procedure explains how to finish the storage configuration. To complete the storage configuration 1 On the Expert Partitioner page, inspect the information displayed. Press the right-arrow key to display the Mount column. Make sure that the Mount column is correct. If it is not, quit YaST and attempt the storage configuration again. 2 Select Apply and press Enter. 3 On the Changes pop-up that appears, select Finish and press Enter. 4 Select Quit and press Enter. Completing the software reinstallation The following procedure explains how to complete the process of reinstalling your software on the failed nodes.

133 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery of an unclustered PureDisk storage pool from a NetBackup disaster recovery backup (NetBackup, unclustered recovery) 133 To complete the software reinstallation 1 (Conditional) Log in as root to the node that hosts the storage pool authority service and install the latest DR_Restore_all.sh script. Perform this step if you added PureDisk application patches or updates to your storage pool before the disaster. Type the following command: # tar -C / -xf upgrade_tar_file./opt/pdinstall/lib/drrestoreall.php For upgrade_tar_file, specify the full path to the location of the latest update or patch that your PureDisk environment was running. For example: # tar -C / -xf /root/nb_pde_ tar./opt/pdistall/lib/drrestoreall.php 2 (Conditional) Install the NetBackup client software on all nodes that failed. Perform this step if you write your disaster recovery backups to a NetBackup environment. 3 Proceed to one of the following: See Performing a disaster recovery of an unclustered PureDisk storage pool from a NetBackup disaster recovery backup (NetBackup, unclustered recovery) on page 133. See Performing a disaster recovery from a Samba backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) on page 138. See Performing a disaster recovery from a third-party product backup (third-party, unclustered recovery) on page 147. Performing a disaster recovery of an unclustered PureDisk storage pool from a NetBackup disaster recovery backup (NetBackup, unclustered recovery) The following procedure explains how to recover an unclustered PureDisk storage pool that was backed with NetBackup.

134 134 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery of an unclustered PureDisk storage pool from a NetBackup disaster recovery backup (NetBackup, unclustered recovery) To perform a disaster recovery from a NetBackup disaster recovery backup 1 (Conditional) Clean up after a failed full disaster recovery backup. See (Conditional) Cleaning up after a failed full disaster recovery backup (NetBackup, unclustered recovery) on page Use the DR_Restore_all script. See Using the DR_Restore_all script (NetBackup, unclustered recovery) on page 134. (Conditional) Cleaning up after a failed full disaster recovery backup (NetBackup, unclustered recovery) Perform this procedure only if a previous full disaster recovery backup failed. To expire the backup images from failed backups From the NetBackup interface, manually expire any NetBackup images that are newer than the date of the last successful backup. Symantec highly recommends that you purge any corrupted backup images from any unsuccessful backups before you try the restore. You can search the catalog and use the PureDisk server as the client name. Look for the images that have the Standard and DataStore disaster recovery policies. For information about how to search the catalog for images, see the NetBackup Administrator s Guide, Volume I. Using the DR_Restore_all script (NetBackup, unclustered recovery) The DR_Restore_all script initiates a dialog with you. Answer the questions that the script displays. To use the DR_Restore_all script 1 Make sure that all storage partitions are mounted. For example, use the following mount(8) command to verify the mounts: # mount grep Storage 2 Run the disaster recovery script from the storage pool authority node. From the PDOS command line, type the following command: # /opt/pdinstall/dr_restore_all.sh

135 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery of an unclustered PureDisk storage pool from a NetBackup disaster recovery backup (NetBackup, unclustered recovery) Specify the method you used to back up PureDisk. For example: Please choose the method you used to do the Disaster Recovery Backup 1. NetBackup 2. Samba Share 3. Local Directory Backup Method (1 2 3): 1 4 Affirm whether you installed the NetBackup client on the node. If you answer no, the script stops and you must restart the script after you install the NetBackup client software. For example: Is the NetBackup client installed on all nodes and pointing to the NBU Server that was used to do the backups? [Yn]: y 5 Provide the full path of any upgrade patch files that need to be applied. Please provide the location of the upgrade patch tar file. For multiple patches, enter in the order they should be applied. (leave blank for none) : For example: /root/nb_pde_ tar Leave blank and press Enter if there are no patches to apply. To apply multiple upgrade patches, provide the latest that can be installed on top of the base version. Otherwise, provide the patch locations in the order the patches should be applied. This situation is applicable to EEBs. Next, respond to the following prompt: Are there any more patches that need to be applied? (Yn) : Answer yes (y) to apply additional patches. Answer no (n) to continue with the disaster recovery process. 6 Respond to the prompts regarding the topology file. Directory /Storage/etc must contain the following files:

136 136 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery of an unclustered PureDisk storage pool from a NetBackup disaster recovery backup (NetBackup, unclustered recovery) topology.ini or topology.ini.enc topology_nodes.ini If these files are not present, the script retrieves them. If topology.ini.enc is present, the script issues the following prompt for the password: topology.ini file needs to be decrypted before proceeding enter aes-256-cbc decryption password: Type the password that you use for the storage pool configuration wizard. 7 Examine the topology information the script displays and specify the nodes you want to restore. The script reads the topology file and presents a display like the following example: STORAGE POOL TOPOLOGY Node IP Address Services spa mbe mbs cr nbu cr Node number(s): 1 The preceding example shows the topology that the script can restore in this disaster recovery operation. Examine this information for accuracy and specify the node numbers that you want to restore. If you want to restore more than one node, use commas to separate the node numbers. If a node did not fail and you want to preserve the data on that node, do not specify that node number. The restore procedure completely reinstalls the whole topology. However, for the nodes that did not fail, the script hides everything in /Storage by unmounting the mount points before it removes the data. After the reinstall is complete, the script performs the following actions: Remounts those mount points Restores all the data on the failed nodes Restores all the databases on all the nodes Restores any removed data. A data removal job might have been run since the last time the databases were backed up. For this reason, the script also restores the removed data on the nodes that did not fail. This action synchronizes the databases and data.

137 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery of an unclustered PureDisk storage pool from a NetBackup disaster recovery backup (NetBackup, unclustered recovery) Respond to queries from the script regarding passwords. The restore process can take hours to complete. As the script runs, you might be asked to specify the system passwords for the remote (or local) nodes. This prompt occurs early in the process during secure shell (SSH) authentication. 9 (Conditional) Respond to the queries that are displayed by the upgrade patches. Refer to the README files that came with the upgrade patches for specific details about the queries. Respond no to creating jobs for upgrading agents. At the end of the upgrade installation, the script prompts you to encrypt the topology.ini file. Answer no at this time to continue. You will have a chance to encrypt the topology.ini file at the end of the disaster recovery process. 10 When the restore is complete, answer the prompts about encryption of the topology.ini file. For example: Would you like to encrypt the topology.ini file? [Yn]:y Encrypting /opt/pdinstall/topology.ini enter aes-256-cbc encryption password: xxxx Verifying - enter aes-256-cbc encryption password: Type the password that you use for the storage pool configuration wizard. 11 Observe the completion message. When the operation completes successfully, the script displays the following message: Disaster recovery complete 12 (Conditional) Run the following script on the storage pool authority node to upgrade the security protocol: # /opt/pdinstall/disable_sslv2.sh Perform this step if you ran the disable_sslv2.sh script on this storage pool at any time. The disaster recovery restore does not enable this script automatically. Symantec recommends that you run the script unless PureDisk 6.5.x storage pools need to replicate to this storage pool.

138 138 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a Samba backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) 13 Perform a full disaster recovery backup. Make sure you perform a full disaster recovery backup before you perform any file backups or perform any incremental disaster recovery backups. 14 (Conditional) Re-enable the NetBackup export engine on any nodes that hosted only a NetBackup export engine service. Perform this step only if you have a node that hosted only a NetBackup export engine service. For information about how to enable a NetBackup export engine, see the following: See About exporting data to NetBackup on page 73. Performing a disaster recovery from a Samba backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) The following procedure explains how to recover an unclustered PureDisk storage pool that was backed up to a Samba backup. To perform a disaster recovery from a Samba backup 1 (Conditional) Recreate your topology information. See (Conditional) Recreate your topology information (Samba, unclustered recovery) on page (Conditional) Remove corrupted files from an incomplete backup. See (Conditional) Removing corrupted files from an incomplete backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) on page (Conditional) Prepare the storage pool authority node for disaster recovery. See (Conditional) Preparing the storage pool authority node for disaster recovery (Samba, unclustered recovery) on page Use the DR_Restore_all script. See Using the DR_Restore_all script (Samba, unclustered recovery) on page 141. (Conditional) Recreate your topology information (Samba, unclustered recovery) Perform one of the procedures in this section if you enabled encryption for your disaster recovery backups.

139 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a Samba backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) 139 You need your storage pool's topology information in order to perform the restore. Perform one of the following procedures: See (Conditional) Recreating the topology with current topology information (Samba, unclustered recovery) on page 139. See (Conditional) Recreating the topology without current topology information (Samba, unclustered recovery) on page 139. (Conditional) Recreating the topology with current topology information (Samba, unclustered recovery) Perform the following procedure if all of the following conditions are true: You enabled encryption in the PureDisk disaster recovery backup policy. You have a backup copy of this storage pool s topology and you can recreate it. To recreate the topology when you have the storage pool s topology information Enter the following command and follow the prompts to recreate this storage pool s topology: # /opt/pdinstall/edit_topology.sh Your goal is to recreate the PureDisk topology so that it matches the topology that existed before the disaster. For information about the storage pool s topology and node identification information, see the worksheets that you completed during this storage pool s installation. (Conditional) Recreating the topology without current topology information (Samba, unclustered recovery) Perform the following procedure if all of the following conditions are true: You enabled encryption in the PureDisk disaster recovery backup policy. You do not have a backup copy of this storage pool s topology.

140 140 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a Samba backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) To recreate the topology without current topology information 1 Enter the following command and follow the prompts to recreate this storage pool s topology: # /opt/pdinstall/edit_topology.sh Include only the storage pool authority in the topology. Note: Make sure you enter the correct storage pool ID. Make sure that all passwords you use during the disaster recovery process are the same as those that existed before the disaster occurred. 2 Enter the following command to install the new storage pool: # /opt/pdinstall/install_newstoragepool.sh 3 Remove the following files: /Storage/etc/topology.ini /Storage/etc/topology_nodes.ini The preceding files are not needed at this time. The disaster recovery script restores these files from the backup. (Conditional) Removing corrupted files from an incomplete backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) Perform this procedure only if a previous full disaster recovery backup failed. The PureDisk disaster recovery full backup scripts create a previous directory at the root level of the share that contains the previous backup data. PureDisk creates this directory at the start of the full backup and removes it at the end of a successful backup. If the backup fails, the previous directory still exists on the share. If this directory exists at the start of another backup run, PureDisk preserves the contents. It deletes the current backup data (from the failed backup) before it starts the new backup. PureDisk removes the previous directory only when a new full backup is successful. If you need to do a disaster restore and the previous directory exists, move the contents of this directory to the share s root level. Then remove the previous directory. The contents currently under the share are from a failed disaster recovery backup because the previous directory exists.

141 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a Samba backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) 141 To remove corrupted files from an incomplete backup 1 Search for a directory that is called previous in the root level of the share. The directory contains the previous backup data. 2 Move the contents of the previous directory to the root level of the share. 3 Remove the directory called previous. (Conditional) Preparing the storage pool authority node for disaster recovery (Samba, unclustered recovery) Perform this procedure if the following statements are true: You are NOT restoring the storage pool authority node of your PureDisk environment. The PureDisk version you are restoring requires upgrade patches. To prepare the storage pool authority node for disaster recovery 1 Log on to the storage pool authority node. 2 Change to the /opt/pdconfigure/var/nodesoftware directory. 3 Remove all files in this directory with the name patch-*.tgz. You should now only have one file left with the name puredisk-base_version.tgz, where base_version is the base version of your PureDisk environment. If you were running 6.6.X.X, the file would be puredisk tgz. Using the DR_Restore_all script (Samba, unclustered recovery) The DR_Restore_all script initiates a dialog with you. You need to answer the questions that the script displays. To use the DR_Restore_all script 1 Make sure that all storage partitions are mounted. For example, use the following mount(8) command to verify the mounts: # mount grep Storage 2 Run the disaster recovery script from the storage pool authority node. From the PDOS command line, type the following command: # /opt/pdinstall/dr_restore_all.sh

142 142 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a Samba backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) 3 Specify the method you used to back up PureDisk. For example: Please choose the method you used to do the Disaster Recovery Backup 1. NetBackup 2. Samba Share 3. Local Directory Backup Method (1 2 3): 2 4 Provide the information that PureDisk needs to mount the shared file system. For example: Please enter remote samba share (i.e. // /remoteSambaShare): //rmns1.min.boston.com/pd_drdata 5 Provide information about the local mount point. The local mount point is the path name of a directory on which to mount the share. If you used the DR_Restore_all script in the default PureDisk location, the mount point must be /DRdata. Please enter local mount point (default: /DRdata): If appropriate, press Enter to accept the default. 6 Provide authentication information. This information includes the user name, password, and work group for the Samba share on the remote file server. For example: Please enter samba user name: pduser Please enter samba password: pdpwd Please enter samba workgroup: pdwgroup Please enter location to restore CR data and spool area from (default: /DRdata):

143 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a Samba backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) Type the full system path name to the disaster recovery script used to save your PureDisk data. If you used the DR_Restore_all script in the default PureDisk location, press return. If you supplied your own restore script, PureDisk does not protect it. The scripts are overwritten during a restore procedure if they remain in the default installation directory (/opt). You must write them to another directory for protection (for example, in /usr or /tmp). For example: Please enter full path of customized DR restore script (default: /opt/pdconfigure/scripts/support/dr_backupsamplescripts/drresto re.sh): 8 Respond to the prompts regarding encryption. If you used a pdkeyutil password to enable encryption of your disaster recovery data during backup, supply the password that you specified. If you did not use pdkeyutil, type no; the script does not ask you for a password. For example: Was encryption used to do the Disaster Recovery Backup [Yn]: y Please provide the pdkeyutil pass phrase: *******

144 144 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a Samba backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) 9 Provide the full path of any upgrade patch files that need to be applied. Please provide the location of the upgrade patch tar file. For multiple patches, enter in the order they should be applied. (leave blank for none) : For example: /root/nb_pde_ tar Leave blank and press Enter if there are no patches to apply. To apply multiple upgrade patches, provide the latest that can be installed on top of the base version. Otherwise, provide the patch locations in the order the patches should be applied. This situation is applicable to EEBs. Next, respond to the following prompt: Are there any more patches that need to be applied? (Yn) : Answer yes (y) to apply additional patches. Answer no (n) to continue with the disaster recovery process. 10 Type the storage pool ID for the storage pool that you want to restore. This ID is the value specified for the storagepoolid property in the topology.ini file. This value is used to retrieve the topology file. For example: Please enter Storage Pool ID: 11 Respond to the prompts regarding the topology file. Directory /Storage/etc must contain the following files: topology.ini or topology.ini.enc topology_nodes.ini If these files are not present, the script retrieves them. If topology.ini.enc is present, the script issues the following prompt for the password: topology.ini file needs to be decrypted before proceeding enter aes-256-cbc decryption password: Type the password that you use for the storage pool configuration wizard. 12 Examine the topology information the script displays and specify the nodes you want to restore. The script reads the topology file and presents a display like the following example:

145 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a Samba backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) 145 STORAGE POOL TOPOLOGY Node IP Address Services spa mbe mbs cr nbu cr Node number(s): 1 The preceding example shows the topology that the script can restore in this disaster recovery operation. Examine this information for accuracy and specify the node numbers that you want to restore. If you want to restore more than one node, use commas to separate the node numbers. If a node did not fail and you want to preserve the data on that node, do not specify that node number. The restore procedure completely reinstalls the whole topology. However, for the nodes that did not fail, the script hides everything in /Storage by unmounting the mount points before it removes the data. After the reinstall is complete, the script performs the following actions: Remounts those mount points Restores all the data on the failed nodes Restores all the databases on all the nodes Restores the removed data. A data removal job might have been run since the last time the databases were backed up. For this reason, the script also restores the removed data on the nodes that did not fail. This method synchronizes the databases and data. 13 Respond to queries from the script regarding passwords. The restore process can take hours to complete. As the process runs, you might be asked to specify the system passwords for the remote (or local) nodes. This prompt occurs early in the process during SSH authentication. 14 (Conditional) Respond to queries that are displayed by the upgrade patches. Refer to the README files that came with the upgrade patches for specific details about the queries. Respond no to creating jobs for upgrading agents. At the end of the upgrade installation, the script prompts you to encrypt the topology.ini file. Answer no at this time to continue. You have another chance to encrypt the topology.ini file at the end of the disaster recovery process.

146 146 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a Samba backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) 15 When the restore is complete, answer the prompts about encryption of the topology.ini file. For example: Would you like to encrypt the topology.ini file? [Yn]:y Encrypting /opt/pdinstall/topology.ini enter aes-256-cbc encryption password: xxxx Verifying - enter aes-256-cbc encryption password: Type the password that you use for the storage pool configuration wizard. 16 Observe the completion message. When the operation completes successfully, the script displays the following message: Disaster recovery complete 17 (Conditional) Run the following script on the storage pool authority node to upgrade the security protocol: # /opt/pdinstall/disable_sslv2.sh Perform this step if you ran the disable_sslv2.sh script on this storage pool at any time. The disaster recovery restore does not enable this script automatically. Symantec recommends that you run the script unless PureDisk 6.5.x storage pools need to replicate to this storage pool. 18 Perform a full disaster recovery backup. Make sure you perform a full disaster recovery backup before you perform any file backups or perform any incremental disaster recovery backups. 19 (Conditional) Re-enable the NetBackup export engine on any nodes that hosted only a NetBackup export engine service. Perform this step only if you have a node that hosted only a NetBackup export engine service. For information about how to enable a NetBackup export engine, see the following: See About exporting data to NetBackup on page 73.

147 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a third-party product backup (third-party, unclustered recovery) 147 Performing a disaster recovery from a third-party product backup (third-party, unclustered recovery) The following procedure explains how to recover an unclustered PureDisk storage pool that was backed up to a third-party product. To perform a disaster recovery from a third-party product 1 (Conditional) Recreate your topology information. See (Conditional) Recreate your topology information (third-party, unclustered recovery) on page (Conditional) Remove corrupted files from an incomplete full disaster recovery backup. See (Conditional) Removing corrupted files from an incomplete full disaster recovery backup (third-party, unclustered recovery) on page (Conditional) Prepare the storage pool authority node for disaster recovery. See (Conditional) Preparing the storage pool authority node for disaster recovery (third-party, unclustered recovery) on page Run the DR_Restore_all script. See Using the DR_Restore_all script (third-party, unclustered recovery) on page 150. (Conditional) Recreate your topology information (third-party, unclustered recovery) Perform one of the following procedures if you enabled encryption for your disaster recovery backups. You need your storage pool's topology information in order to perform the restore. Perform one of the following procedures: See (Conditional) Recreating the topology with current topology information (third-party, unclustered recovery) on page 147. See (Conditional) Recreating the topology without current topology information (third-party, unclustered recovery) on page 148. (Conditional) Recreating the topology with current topology information (third-party, unclustered recovery) Perform the following procedure if all of the following conditions are true: You enabled encryption in the PureDisk disaster recovery backup policy.

148 148 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a third-party product backup (third-party, unclustered recovery) You have a backup copy of this storage pool s topology and you can recreate it. To recreate the topology when you have the storage pool s topology information Enter the following command and follow the prompts to recreate this storage pool s topology: # /opt/pdinstall/edit_topology.sh Your goal is to recreate the PureDisk topology so that it matches the topology that existed before the disaster. For information about the storage pool s topology and node identification information, see the worksheets that you completed during this storage pool s installation. (Conditional) Recreating the topology without current topology information (third-party, unclustered recovery) Perform the following procedure if all of the following conditions are true: You enabled encryption in the PureDisk disaster recovery backup policy. You do not have a backup copy of this storage pool s topology.

149 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a third-party product backup (third-party, unclustered recovery) 149 To recreate the topology without current topology information 1 Enter the following command and follow the prompts to recreate this storage pool s topology: # /opt/pdinstall/edit_topology.sh Include only the storage pool authority in the topology. Note: Make sure you enter the correct storage pool ID. Make sure that all passwords you use during the disaster recovery process are the same as those that existed before the disaster occurred. 2 Enter the following command to install the new storage pool: # /opt/pdinstall/install_newstoragepool.sh 3 Remove the following files: /Storage/etc/topology.ini /Storage/etc/topology_nodes.ini The preceding files are not needed at this time. The disaster recovery script restores these files from the backup. (Conditional) Removing corrupted files from an incomplete full disaster recovery backup (third-party, unclustered recovery) Symantec recommends that you follow some procedure at your site to ensure that the complete contents of a disaster recovery backup are preserved. The preservation ensures consistent backup data. For example, assume that you perform a full disaster recovery backup each Monday. On the first Monday of the month, the backup runs without problems. On the second Monday of the month, the disaster recovery backup removes the contents of the first Monday s backup. However, the second full disaster recovery backup fails. This failure leaves you without any consistent backup data. See (Conditional) Removing corrupted files from an incomplete backup (Samba, unclustered recovery) on page 140.

150 150 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a third-party product backup (third-party, unclustered recovery) To remove corrupted files from an incomplete full disaster recovery backup 1 Examine your backup repository. 2 Locate the last successful backup. 3 Remove any subsequent failed backups from the system. (Conditional) Preparing the storage pool authority node for disaster recovery (third-party, unclustered recovery) Perform this procedure if the following statements are true: You are NOT restoring the storage pool authority node of your PureDisk environment. The PureDisk version you are restoring requires upgrade patches. To prepare the storage pool authority node for disaster recovery 1 Log on to the storage pool authority node. 2 Change to the /opt/pdconfigure/var/nodesoftware directory. 3 Remove all files in this directory with the name patch-*.tgz. You should now only have one file left with the name puredisk-base_version.tgz, where base_version is the base version of your PureDisk environment. If you were running 6.6.X.X, the file could be puredisk tgz. Using the DR_Restore_all script (third-party, unclustered recovery) The following procedure explains how to use the DR_Restore_all script. To use the DR_Restore_all script 1 Make sure that all storage partitions are mounted. For example, use the following mount(8) command to verify the mounts: # mount grep Storage 2 Run the disaster recovery script from the storage pool authority node. From the PDOS command line, type the following command: # /opt/pdinstall/dr_restore_all.sh

151 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a third-party product backup (third-party, unclustered recovery) Specify the method you used to back up PureDisk. For example: Please choose the method you used to do the Disaster Recovery Backup 1. NetBackup 2. Samba Share 3. Local Directory Backup Method (1 2 3): 3 4 Provide information about where the data to be restored is located. Press Enter to accept the defaults for the following prompts: Please enter location to restore metadata from (default: /DRdata): Please enter location to restore CR data and spool area from (default: /DRdata): 5 Type the full system path name to the disaster recovery script used to save your PureDisk data. If you used the DR_Restore_all script in the default PureDisk location, press return. If you supplied your own restore script, remember that the scripts are not protected. The scripts are overwritten during a restore procedure if they remain in the default installation directory (/opt). To prevent this problem, you must place them in another directory for protection, such as in /usr or /tmp. For example: Please enter full path of customized DR restore script (default: /opt/pdconfigure/scripts/support/dr_backupsamplescripts/drresto re.sh): 6 Respond to the prompts regarding encryption. If you used a pdkeyutil password to enable encryption of your disaster recovery data during backup, supply the password that you specified. If you did not use pdkeyutil, type no; the script does not ask you for a password. Was encryption used to do the Disaster Recovery Backup [Yn]: y Please provide the pdkeyutil pass phrase: *******

152 152 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a third-party product backup (third-party, unclustered recovery) 7 Provide the full path of any upgrade patch files that need to be applied. Please provide the location of the upgrade patch tar file. For multiple patches, enter in the order they should be applied. (leave blank for none) : For example: /root/nb_pde_ tar Leave blank and press Enter if there are no patches to apply. To apply multiple upgrade patches, provide the latest that can be installed on top of the base version. Otherwise, provide the patch locations in the order the patches should be applied. This situation is applicable to EEBs. Next, respond to the following prompt: Are there any more patches that need to be applied? (Yn) : Answer yes (y) to apply additional patches. Answer no (n) to continue with the disaster recovery process. 8 Type the storage pool ID for the storage pool that you want to restore. This name is the value specified for the storagepoolid property in the topology.ini file. This value is used to retrieve the topology file. For example: Please enter Storage Pool ID: 9 Respond to the prompts regarding the topology file. Directory /Storage/etc must contain the following files: topology.ini or topology.ini.enc topology_nodes.ini If these files are not present, the script retrieves them. If topology.ini.enc is present, the script issues the following prompt for the password: topology.ini file needs to be decrypted before proceeding enter aes-256-cbc decryption password: Type the password that you use for the storage pool configuration wizard. 10 Examine the topology information the script displays and specify the nodes you want to restore.

153 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a third-party product backup (third-party, unclustered recovery) 153 The script reads the topology file and presents a display like the following example: STORAGE POOL TOPOLOGY Node IP Address Services spa mbe mbs cr nbu cr Node number(s): 1 The preceding example shows the topology that the script can restore in this disaster recovery operation. Examine this information for accuracy and specify the node numbers that you want to restore. If you want to restore more than one node, use commas to separate the node numbers. If a node did not fail and you want to preserve the data on that node, do not specify that node number. The restore procedure completely reinstalls the whole topology. However, for the nodes that did not fail, the script hides everything in /Storage by unmounting the mount points before it removes the data. After the reinstall is complete, the script performs the following actions: Remounts those mount points Restores all the data on the failed nodes Restores all the databases on all the nodes Restores the removed data. A data removal job might have been run since the last time the databases were backed up. In that case, the script also restores the removed data on the nodes that did not fail. This method synchronizes the databases and data. 11 Respond to queries from the script regarding passwords. The restore process can take hours to complete. As the script runs, you might be asked to specify the system passwords for the remote (or local) nodes. This prompt occurs early in the process during SSH authentication.

154 154 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a third-party product backup (third-party, unclustered recovery) 12 (Conditional) Respond to the queries that are displayed by the upgrade patches. Refer to the README files that came with the upgrade patches for specific details about the queries. Respond no to creating jobs for upgrading agents. At the end of the upgrade installation, the script prompts you to encrypt the topology.ini file. Answer no at this time to continue. You have a chance to encrypt the topology.ini file at the end of the disaster recovery process. 13 When the restore is complete, answer the prompts about encryption of the topology.ini file. For example: Would you like to encrypt the topology.ini file? [Yn]:y Encrypting /opt/pdinstall/topology.ini enter aes-256-cbc encryption password: xxxx Verifying - enter aes-256-cbc encryption password: Type the password that you use for the storage pool configuration wizard. 14 Observe the completion message. When the operation completes successfully, the script displays the following message: Disaster recovery complete 15 (Conditional) Run the following script on the storage pool authority node to upgrade the security protocol: # /opt/pdinstall/disable_sslv2.sh Perform this step if you ran the disable_sslv2.sh script on this storage pool at any time. The disaster recovery restore does not enable this script automatically. Symantec recommends that you run the script unless PureDisk 6.5.x storage pools need to replicate to this storage pool.

155 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a third-party product backup (third-party, unclustered recovery) Perform a full disaster recovery backup. Make sure you perform a full disaster recovery backup before you perform any file backups or perform any incremental disaster recovery backups. 17 (Conditional) Re-enable the NetBackup export engine on any nodes that hosted only a NetBackup export engine service. Perform this step only if you have a node that hosted only a NetBackup export engine service. For information about how to enable a NetBackup export engine, see the following: See About exporting data to NetBackup on page 73.

156 156 Disaster recovery for unclustered storage pools Performing a disaster recovery from a third-party product backup (third-party, unclustered recovery)

157 Chapter 7 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools This chapter includes the following topics: About restoring a clustered PureDisk environment Recovering from a single-node failover Recovering one active node Recovering from a data storage corruption Recovering from a complete storage pool disaster (clustered, complete storage pool disaster) (Conditional) Cleaning up after a failed full disaster recovery backup (Conditional) Recreate your topology information Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data About restoring a clustered PureDisk environment Perform the procedures in this chapter when other methods to recover data have failed. No matter how frequently you have performed disaster recovery backups, data loss is possible with any restore procedure. When a clustered storage pool experiences a disaster, determine the type of disaster the storage pool experienced. Clustered storage pool disasters can take on one of the following forms: Single-node failover. In this scenario, only one node has failed. The storage pool is still functioning, but you need to recover the failed node so you can put it back into service.

158 158 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools About restoring a clustered PureDisk environment One-node or multiple-node failure. In this scenario, at least one node in a cluster has failed, but other nodes in the cluster are still running. In this scenario, the storage pool has not experienced a complete disaster because some active nodes are still running. The disaster recovery procedure explains how to recover one node. Repeat the procedure on other nodes if more than one node has failed. Data storage corruption. In this scenario, the shared disks that host /Storage, /Storage/data, and/or /Storage/databases are corrupt. Complete disaster. In this scenario, all or most of the storage pool has experienced a disaster such as a computer-room flood or fire. You need to recover multiple nodes. To perform a disaster recovery of a clustered storage pool 1 Prepare the failed nodes for recovery. In most cases, no matter what kind of disaster occurred, you need to prepare the nodes before you run the disaster recovery script (DR_Restore_all.sh). Perform one of the following procedures, depending on type of disaster that occurred: See Recovering from a single-node failover on page 159. See Recovering one active node on page 160. See Recovering from a data storage corruption on page 166. See Recovering from a complete storage pool disaster (clustered, complete storage pool disaster) on page (Conditional) Clean up after a failed full disaster recovery backup. Perform the following procedure if a previous full disaster recovery backup failed: See (Conditional) Cleaning up after a failed full disaster recovery backup on page 172.

159 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Recovering from a single-node failover (Conditional) Recreate your topology. Perform this step if you enable encryption during your disaster recovery backups and if you backed up your storage pool to a Samba shared file system or to a third-party product. See (Conditional) Recreate your topology information on page Run the DR_Restore_all.sh script. The script prompts you to specify information about the storage pool. The script's questions differ depending on the disaster recovery backup method you used. See Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data on page 175. For information about how to perform disaster recovery backups and how to create PureDisk disaster recovery backup policies, see the following: See About performing disaster recovery backups on page 100. See Enabling NetBackup for PureDisk backups on page 104. Some of the clustered disaster recovery procedures use PureDisk 6.5.x installation tools. The disaster recovery procedures assume some familiarity with these tools. For more information about these tools, see the PureDisk version of the following manual: PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide. Recovering from a single-node failover The Veritas Cluster Server (VCS) software ensures that the services on a failing node migrate smoothly to one of the passive nodes automatically. Such situations include solving node-specific hardware problems, general node maintenance, and so on. Alternately, an administrator can manually transfer services from an active node to a passive node from the Cluster Manager Java console. The following procedure explains how to recover the failed node and return it to service.

160 160 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Recovering one active node To recover a failed node 1 Use the following procedure to recover the failed node and return it to service as a passive node: See Adding a new passive node to a cluster on page (Conditional) Reinstall the NetBackup client software on all failed nodes. Perform this step if a NetBackup client was installed on the failed nodes before the disaster. If you back up your storage pool to NetBackup or if you use the NetBackup export engine, install the NetBackup client on the failed nodes now. For information about how to install a NetBackup client, see your NetBackup documentation. Recovering one active node If you have several nodes in a clustered storage pool, it is possible for only one, two, or several active nodes to fail. In this scenario, at least one node in a cluster has failed, but the storage pool has not experienced a complete disaster because some active nodes are still running. The following procedure explains how to recover a single active node. If more than one active node failed, repeat this procedure for each active node that failed. To recover one active node 1 Reinstall the PDOS software and the VCS software. See Reinstalling the PDOS software and the VCS software on page Recreate the disks and volumes. See Recreating disks and volumes on page Run the DR_Restore_all.sh script. See Running the DR_Restore_all script on page 165. Reinstalling the PDOS software and the VCS software The following procedure explains how to reinstall PDOS and VCS on a failed node.

161 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Recovering one active node 161 To reinstall PDOS and VCS on one active node 1 Locate this storage pool's cluster planning spreadsheet. When the storage pool was installed initially, the person who performed the installation should have completed the PureDisk cluster planning spreadsheet. The spreadsheet is in a file named PureDisk_ClusterPlanning.xls. It can be easier to restore a clustered storage pool if you have access to the information that is on the spreadsheet. If you do not have completed cluster planning spreadsheet from this storage pool's initial installation, you can get a blank one from the following Web site: Alternatively, see file /opt/pdweb/htdocs/documentation/puredisk_clusterplanning.xls for a new copy of this file. 2 Use the Cluster Manager Java Console to offline all service groups from all the nodes. From the Cluster Manager Java Console, right-click the cluster group, and select Offline > All Systems. 3 Remove all service groups from all the nodes. Right-click each group and select delete to prevent VCS from taking any action while you recover the PureDisk storage pool. 4 Reinstall PDOS on the failed nodes. Use the PDOS installation information in the following manual: PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide. On the PDOS main menu, you can select either Install (to use the installation wizard) or you can select Expert (to perform the installation manually). On each failed node, perform additional configuration steps as needed for your environment. For example, make sure to consult the chapter called "Preparing to configure the storage pool" in the installation guide. 5 On each failed node, install the clustering software. The following explains how to install VCS manually on PDOS 6.6: See About the Veritas Cluster Server (VCS) software installation on page 341. If you are familiar with the typical VCS installation procedure, be aware of the following differences:

162 162 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Recovering one active node When the VCS installer prompts you to specify the nodes on which to install the software, specify only the failed nodes. Do not install VCS on the nodes that do not need to be recovered. If you install VCS on only one node, the VCS installer issues a warning. The warning asks you to confirm that you want to install only a single-node cluster. Answer y. At the end of the VCS 4.1 MP3 installation, the VCS installer asks you to specify whether you are ready to configure VCS. Answer n. 6 For each node, type the following command to configure a service address on the public NIC in the node: # ip a a ip_address dev ethn For ip_address, specify the service IP address of the service you want to configure. For n, specify the number of the public network interface card (NIC) on this node. For example, on node1.acme.com, you could type the following command: # ip a a dev eth1 Note: Make sure to repeat this step on each active node, including the healthy nodes. Because you removed the service groups for the entire storage pool, you need to recreate the service addresses for each node at this time. 7 Proceed to the following: Recreating disks and volumes See Recreating disks and volumes on page 162. The following procedure explains how to recreate the disks, recreate the disk volumes, and mount the disk volumes. To recreate the disks and volumes 1 Reinitialize the node's disk volumes on all nodes, even those that did not fail. Perform the following steps to import all nodes' disk volumes on all storage pool nodes: Import the disk group that is associated with this node: # vxdg import disk_group_name

163 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Recovering one active node 163 For more information about this command, see the Veritas Storage Foundation documentation. On each active node that you want to restore, type the following command to start that node's disk volumes: # vxvol -g disk_group_name startall For more information about this command, see the Veritas Storage Foundation documentation. Repeat the preceding steps on all nodes. Make sure to import and start the disk volumes on all nodes in the storage pool, including those that did not fail. 2 (Conditional) Type the following command to create the /Storage directory: Perform this step on the failed node if the disks attached to the node crashed or if the /Storage directory does not exist. # mkdir /Storage 3 (Conditional) Issue the mount(8) command to mount /Storage on this node. Perform this step if you created the /Storage directory in the previous step. This command has the following format: mount -t vxfs /dev/vx/dsk/disk_group_name/volume_name /Storage For disk_group_name and volume_name, specify the full hardware path to the /Storage volume that you created on this node. For example: # mount -t vxfs /dev/vx/dsk/dg1/disk1 /Storage As you mount /Storage on each node, make sure that the mount attaches to a different disk for each PureDisk node. Connect each node to a different LUN. 4 (Conditional) Remove the existing topology files. Perform this step if the node you want to recover is the storage pool authority node. Remove the following files: topology.ini or topology.ini.enc

164 164 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Recovering one active node topology_nodes.ini 5 (Conditional) Create the /Storage/data directory. Perform this step if a /Storage/data partition existed on this node before the disaster and this directory no longer exists. Type the following command: # mkdir /Storage/data 6 (Conditional) Issue the mount(8) command to mount /Storage/data on this node. Perform this step if you created a /Storage/data directory. This command has the following format: mount -t vxfs /dev/vx/dsk/disk_group_name/volume_name /Storage/data For disk_group_name and volume_name, specify the full hardware path to the /Storage/data volume that you created on this node. 7 (Conditional) Create the /Storage/databases directory. Perform this step if a /Storage/databases partition existed on this node before the disaster and this directory no longer exists. Type the following command: # mkdir /Storage/databases 8 (Conditional) Issue the mount(8) command to mount /Storage/databases on this node. Perform this step if you created a /Storage/databases directory. This command has the following format: mount -t vxfs /dev/vx/dsk/disk_group_name/volume_name /Storage/databases For disk_group_name and volume_name, specify the full hardware path to the /Storage/databases volume that you created on this node.

165 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Recovering one active node (Conditional) Specify correct directory permissions for /Storage/databases. Perform this step if you created a /Storage/databases partition. Type the following command: # chown -R pddb.pddb /Storage/databases 10 Proceed to the following: Running the DR_Restore_all script See Running the DR_Restore_all script on page 165. The following procedure explains how to complete the last disaster recovery preparation steps and points you to the procedure that explains how to run the DR_Restore_all.sh script. To run the DR_Restore_all.sh script 1 (Conditional) Reinstall the NetBackup client software on all failed nodes. Perform this step if a NetBackup client was installed on the failed nodes before the disaster. If you back up your storage pool to NetBackup or if you use the NetBackup export engine, install the NetBackup client on the failed nodes now. For information about how to install a NetBackup client, see your NetBackup documentation. 2 (Conditional) Clean up after a failed full disaster recovery backup. Perform the following procedure if a previous full disaster recovery backup failed: See (Conditional) Cleaning up after a failed full disaster recovery backup on page (Conditional) Recreate your topology. Perform this step if you enable encryption during your disaster recovery backups and if you backed up your storage pool to a Samba shared file system or to a third-party product. See (Conditional) Recreate your topology information on page Run the DR_Restore_all.sh script to recover the data. See Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data on page 175.

166 166 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Recovering from a data storage corruption Recovering from a data storage corruption It is possible for the disks that host the storage partitions to become corrupted. You need to perform a disk corruption recovery if the following conditions are present: The PureDisk software failed or if one or more of the databases appears to be corrupted. To determine the state of the databases, examine the log file in the following directory: /Storage/log/pddb/postgresql.log Messages such as the following in the log file are possible signs of a corrupted database: FATAL: could not open file "/Storage/databases/pddb/data/global/1262": No such file or directory LOG: could not open temporary statistics file "/Storage/databases/pddb/data/global/pgstat.tmp.4391": No such file or directory /Storage failed or one or more disks have crashed. When the storage pool generates unexpected results after a failover. When a failover failed to complete. The following procedure explains how to recover from a data storage corruption disaster. To recover from a data storage corruption 1 Recreate the storage partitions that failed. See Recreate the storage partitions that failed on page Recreate the disks and volumes. See Recreating disks and volumes on page Run the DR_Restore_all.sh script. See Running the DR_Restore_all script on page 168. Recreate the storage partitions that failed The following procedure explains how to recreate the storage partitions that failed.

167 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Recovering from a data storage corruption 167 To recreate the storage partitions that failed 1 Clean the cluster service groups. Perform the following steps: Log on to the Cluster Manager Java console. Verify the state of the service groups. After a disaster, some service groups can be in the faulted state on one or more nodes. For each service group that has faulted, right-click the group and select clear fault - auto to clear the faulted state of the service group. Place all service groups offline. Include all service groups, even those service groups on the nodes that the disaster did not affect. Right-click each group and select offline - Any system to shut down PureDisk on all nodes. Remove all service groups, even those that reside on the nodes that the disaster did not affect. Right-click each group and select delete to prevent VCS from taking any action while you recover the PureDisk storage pool. 2 (Conditional) Replace the failed storage mounts. Perform this step if necessary. For example, replace the disk hardware that failed. 3 For each failed node, create new storage partitions to replace the crashed disks. Perform the following procedure if you had to replace the disk hardware: See (Conditional) Using YaST to create the storage partitions on page Proceed to the following: Recreating disks and volumes See Recreating disks and volumes on page 167. The following procedure explains how to recreate the disks, recreate the disk volumes, and mount the disk volumes.

168 168 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Recovering from a data storage corruption To recreate disks and volumes 1 Perform the following procedure: See Recreating disks and volumes on page Proceed to the following: Running the DR_Restore_all script See Running the DR_Restore_all script on page 168. The following procedure explains how to complete the last disaster recovery preparation steps and points you to the procedure that explains how to run the DR_Restore_all.sh script. To run the DR_Restore_all script 1 (Conditional) Extract the storage pool software. Perform this step if you replaced disk hardware that was attached to the node that hosted the storage pool authority service. For example, if you mount the PureDisk software DVD to /cdrom, type the following command: # /cdrom/puredisk/install.sh --force 2 For each node, type the following command to configure a service address on the public NIC in the node: # ip a a ip_address dev ethn For ip_address, specify the service IP address of the service you want to configure. For n, specify the number of the public network interface card (NIC) on this node. For example, on node1.acme.com, you could type the following command: # ip a a dev eth1 Note: Make sure to repeat this step on each active node, including the healthy nodes. Because you removed the service groups for the entire storage pool, you need to recreate the service addresses for each node at this time.

169 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Recovering from a complete storage pool disaster (clustered, complete storage pool disaster) (Conditional) Clean up after a failed full disaster recovery backup. Perform the following procedure if a previous full disaster recovery backup failed: See (Conditional) Cleaning up after a failed full disaster recovery backup on page (Conditional) Recreate your topology. Perform this step if you enable encryption during your disaster recovery backups and if you backed up your storage pool to a Samba shared file system or to a third-party product. See (Conditional) Recreate your topology information on page Run the DR_Restore_all.sh script to recover the data. See Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data on page 175. Recovering from a complete storage pool disaster (clustered, complete storage pool disaster) If your PureDisk nodes and shared storage have failed, you need to recover the entire storage pool. The following procedure explains how to recover all the nodes in a clustered storage pool. To recover all the nodes in a clustered storage pool 1 Reinstall PDOS and disable the service groups. See Reinstalling PDOS and disabling the service groups on page Recreate the disks and volumes. See Recreating disks and volumes on page Run the DR_Restore_all.sh script. See Running the DR_Restore_all script on page 170. Reinstalling PDOS and disabling the service groups The following procedure explains how to reinstall PDOS, offline the service groups, and remove all the service groups.

170 170 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Recovering from a complete storage pool disaster (clustered, complete storage pool disaster) To reinstall PDOS and disable the service groups 1 Reinstall PDOS on all nodes and run the storage pool configuration wizard to configure your storage pool. Reinstall and reconfigure your environment as if this were a new installation. Make sure to configure your storage partitions, nodes, and services as they were before the disaster. If you completed the cluster planning spreadsheet when you performed the initial installation, use it now to help you recreate your topology. For information about how to install PDOS and configure the PureDisk application, see the PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide. 2 Use the Cluster Manager Java Console to offline all service groups from all the nodes. From the Cluster Manager Java Console, right-click the cluster group, and select Offline > All Systems. 3 Remove all service groups. Right-click each group and select delete to prevent VCS from taking any action while you recover the PureDisk storage pool. 4 Proceed to the following: Recreating disks and volumes See Recreating disks and volumes on page 170. The following procedure explains how to recreate the disks, recreate the disk volumes, and mount the disk volumes. To recreate disks and volumes 1 Perform the following procedure: See Recreating disks and volumes on page Proceed to the following: Running the DR_Restore_all script See Running the DR_Restore_all script on page 170. The following procedure explains how to complete the last disaster recovery preparation steps and points you to the procedure that explains how to run the DR_Restore_all.sh script.

171 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Recovering from a complete storage pool disaster (clustered, complete storage pool disaster) 171 To run the DR_Restore_all script 1 Remove the following files from the storage pool authority node: /Storage/etc/topology.ini /Storage/etc/topology_nodes.ini 2 For each node, type the following command to configure a service address on the public NIC in the node: # ip a a ip_address dev ethn For ip_address, specify the service IP address of the service you want to configure. For n, specify the number of the public network interface card (NIC) on this node. For example, on node1.acme.com, you could type the following command: # ip a a dev eth1 Note: Make sure to repeat this step on each active node, including the healthy nodes. Because you removed the service groups for the entire storage pool, you need to recreate the service addresses for each node at this time. 3 (Conditional) Reinstall the NetBackup client software on all failed nodes. Perform this step if a NetBackup client was installed on the failed nodes before the disaster. If you back up your storage pool to NetBackup or if you use the NetBackup export engine, install the NetBackup client on the failed nodes now. For information about how to install a NetBackup client, see your NetBackup documentation. 4 (Conditional) Clean up after a failed full disaster recovery backup. Perform the following procedure if a previous full disaster recovery backup failed: See (Conditional) Cleaning up after a failed full disaster recovery backup on page 172.

172 172 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools (Conditional) Cleaning up after a failed full disaster recovery backup 5 (Conditional) Recreate your topology. Perform this step if you enable encryption during your disaster recovery backups and if you backed up your storage pool to a Samba shared file system or to a third-party product. See (Conditional) Recreate your topology information on page Run the DR_Restore_all.sh script to recover the data. See Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data on page 175. (Conditional) Cleaning up after a failed full disaster recovery backup Perform one of the following procedures only if a previous full disaster recovery backup failed: See Cleaning up after a failed full NetBackup disaster recovery backup (clustered, complete storage pool disaster) on page 172. See Cleaning up after a failed full Samba disaster recovery backup (clustered, complete storage pool disaster) on page 173. See Cleaning up after a failed full third-party product disaster recovery backup (clustered, complete storage pool disaster) on page 173. Cleaning up after a failed full NetBackup disaster recovery backup (clustered, complete storage pool disaster) To clean up after a failed full NetBackup disaster recovery backup, you must expire (or purge) corrupted backup images from previous failed backups. To expire the backup images from failed backups From the NetBackup interface, manually expire any NetBackup images that are newer than the date of the last successful backup. Symantec highly recommends that you purge any corrupted backup images from any unsuccessful backups before you try the restore. See the NetBackup Administrator s Guide, Volume I for information on how to search the catalog for images. You can search the catalog and use the PureDisk server as the client name. Look for the images that have the Standard and DataStore disaster recovery policies.

173 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools (Conditional) Cleaning up after a failed full disaster recovery backup 173 Cleaning up after a failed full Samba disaster recovery backup (clustered, complete storage pool disaster) To clean up after a failed full Samba disaster recovery backup, you must remove any remaining corrupted files from the incomplete backup. The PureDisk disaster recovery full backup scripts create a previous directory at the root level of the share that contains the previous backup data. PureDisk creates this directory at the start of the full backup and removes it at the end of a successful backup. If the backup fails, the previous directory still exists on the share. If this directory exists at the start of another backup run, PureDisk preserves the contents. It deletes the current backup data from the failed backup before it starts the new backup. PureDisk removes the previous directory only when a new full backup is successful. To remove corrupted files from an incomplete backup 1 Search for a directory that is called previous in the root level of the share that contains the previous backup data. 2 Move the contents of the previous directory to the root level of the share. 3 Remove the directory called previous. Cleaning up after a failed full third-party product disaster recovery backup (clustered, complete storage pool disaster) To clean up after a failed full third-party product disaster recovery backup, you must remove any remaining corrupted files from the incomplete backup. Symantec recommends that you follow some procedure at your site to ensure that the complete contents of a disaster recovery backup are preserved. The preservation ensures consistent backup data. For example, assume that you perform a full disaster recovery backup each Monday. On the first Monday of the month, the backup runs without problems. On the second Monday of the month, the disaster recovery backup removes the contents of the first Monday s backup. However, the second full disaster recovery backup fails. This failure leaves you without any consistent backup data. To remove corrupted files from an incomplete backup 1 Examine your backup repository. 2 Locate the last successful backup. 3 Remove any subsequent failed backups from the system.

174 174 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools (Conditional) Recreate your topology information (Conditional) Recreate your topology information Perform one of the procedures in this section if you enabled encryption for your disaster recovery backups. You need your storage pool's topology information in order to perform the restore. Perform one of the following procedures: See (Conditional) Recreating the topology with current topology information (Samba or third-party, clustered recovery) on page 174. See (Conditional) Recreating the topology without current topology information (Samba or third-party, clustered recovery) on page 174. (Conditional) Recreating the topology with current topology information (Samba or third-party, clustered recovery) Perform the following procedure if all of the following conditions are true: You enabled encryption in the PureDisk disaster recovery backup policy. You have a backup copy of this storage pool s topology and you can recreate it. To recreate the topology when you have the storage pool s topology information Enter the following command and follow the prompts to recreate this storage pool s topology: # /opt/pdinstall/edit_topology.sh Your goal is to recreate the PureDisk topology so that it matches the topology that existed before the disaster. For information about the storage pool s topology and node identification information, see the worksheets that you completed during this storage pool s installation. (Conditional) Recreating the topology without current topology information (Samba or third-party, clustered recovery) Perform the following procedure if all of the following conditions are true: You enabled encryption in the PureDisk disaster recovery backup policy. You do not have a backup copy of this storage pool s topology.

175 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data 175 To recreate the topology without current topology information 1 Enter the following command and follow the prompts to recreate this storage pool s topology: # /opt/pdinstall/edit_topology.sh Include only the storage pool authority in the topology. Note: Make sure you enter the correct storage pool ID. Make sure that all passwords you use during the disaster recovery process are the same as those that existed before the disaster occurred. 2 Enter the following command to install the new storage pool: # /opt/pdinstall/install_newstoragepool.sh 3 Remove the following files: /Storage/etc/topology.ini /Storage/etc/topology_nodes.ini The preceding files are not needed at this time. The disaster recovery script restores these files from the backup. Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data After you reinstall the PureDisk software that was destroyed in the disaster, your next task is to run the DR_Restore_all.sh script. The DR_Restore_all.sh script performs the following actions: Prompts for all of the information that is required to restore an entire storage pool. Restores the data that was backed up. Optimizes the content router restore. This action occurs when the disaster affected only a subset of the content routers. The DR_Restore_all.sh script fully restores the /Storage/data directory of all failed content router nodes. If the configuration includes any content routers that do not need to be fully recovered because no diaster occurred, the script does minimal restores. The restores bring the content routers to a state that is consistent with the point in time of the last disaster recovery backup. Since the last backup was done, some data segments might have been removed or added.

176 176 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data In these cases, the script does the following: Restores all databases and configuration files. Restores the segment containers so that they are consistent with the content router databases. Restores all segment containers that a removal job has changed or deleted since last the backup. Creates PureDisk service groups in VCS. The DR_Restore_all.sh script prompts you to specify different information depending on the method you used to perform the disaster recovery backup. Proceed to one of the following, depending on your disaster recovery backup method: See Recovering a PureDisk clustered storage pool from a NetBackup disaster recovery backup on page 176. See Recovering a PureDisk clustered storage pool from a Samba disaster recovery backup on page 183. See Recovering a PureDisk clustered storage pool from a third-party product disaster recovery backup on page 191. Recovering a PureDisk clustered storage pool from a NetBackup disaster recovery backup The following procedure explains how to recover a PureDisk clustered storage pool from a NetBackup disaster recovery backup. To recover a PureDisk clustered storage pool from a NetBackup disaster recovery backup 1 Run the DR_Restore_all script - phase 1. See Running the DR_Restore_all script - phase 1 (NetBackup, clustered recovery) on page Run the DR_Restore_all script - phase 2. See Running the DR_Restore_all script - phase 2 (NetBackup, clustered recovery) on page Finish the restore. See Finishing the restore (NetBackup, clustered recovery) on page 182.

177 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data 177 Running the DR_Restore_all script - phase 1 (NetBackup, clustered recovery) During a disaster recovery, you need to run the DR_Restore_all.sh script in two phases. In phase 1, verify host and service address mappings. Rerun the script after you verify that the host address and service address mappings match. Later, in phase 2, continue to answer the script s prompts regarding the storage pool. To verify the host and service address mappings 1 Log on to the storage pool authority node as root. 2 (Conditional) Make sure that the root_hash file exists on this node. Perform this step if the storage pool uses an external root broker. For more information about external root brokers, see the PureDisk Getting Started Guide and the PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide. 3 Make sure that all storage partitions are mounted. For example, use the following mount(8) command to verify the mounts: # mount grep Storage 4 Type the following command to run the disaster recovery script: # /opt/pdinstall/dr_restore_all.sh 5 Specify the method you used to back up PureDisk. For example: Please choose the method you used to do the Disaster Recovery Backup 1. NetBackup 2. Samba Share 3. Local Directory Backup Method (1 2 3): 1

178 178 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data 6 Affirm whether you installed the NetBackup client on the node. If you answer n, the script stops, and you must restart the script after you install the NetBackup client software. For example: Is the NetBackup client installed on all nodes and pointing to the NBU Server that was used to do the backups? [Yn]: y 7 Provide the full path of any upgrade patch files that need to be applied. Please provide the location of the upgrade patch tar file. For multiple patches, enter in the order they should be applied. (leave blank for none) : For example: /root/nb_pde_ tar For multiple upgrade patches that need to be applied, provide the latest that can be installed on top of the base version. Otherwise, provide in the order the patches should be applied (applicable to EEBs). Leave blank and press Enter if there are no patches to apply. Next, respond to the following prompt: Are there any more patches that need to be applied? (Yn) : Answer yes (y) to apply additional patches. Answer no (n) to continue with the disaster recovery process. 8 Respond to the prompts regarding the topology file. Directory /Storage/etc must contain the following files: topology.ini or topology.ini.enc topology_nodes.ini If these files are not present, the script issues the following prompt: Please provide the virtual Fully Qualified Domain Name of your SPA: Enter the service fully qualified domain name (FQDN) for the storage pool authority (SPA) node. The script retrieves the files from the location you provide. If topology.ini.enc is present, the script issues the following prompt for the password:

179 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data 179 topology.ini file needs to be decrypted before proceeding enter aes-256-cbc decryption password: Type the password that you use for the storage pool configuration wizard. 9 Observe the messages that the script produces and take one of the following actions: If the host and service mappings are synchronized properly with the topology on the storage pool, the script continues. Proceed to the following section: See Running the DR_Restore_all script - phase 2 (NetBackup, clustered recovery) on page 180. If the host and service mappings are not synchronized with the topology on the storage pool, the script issues the following message and stops: WARNING: You are running in a VCS environment. This means the topology_nodes.ini file that has just been restored may be out of date. VCS failover events could have changed the physical - service address mapping for nodes between the time the DR backup last ran and now. To verify these mappings, please run /opt/pdinstall/edit_topology.sh and select option "Edit a node" to edit all PureDisk nodes and spare nodes in your topology. Verify that for PureDisk nodes, the service address in the "Virtual IP/Hostname" entry is on the same node as the physical address in the "IP/Hostname" entry. If not, update the "IP/Hostname" entry to contain the correct physical address for the service address. Verify that for spare nodes, the "IP/Hostname" entry is really the physical address of a node that is currently acting as a spare node. Also, select the option "Configure root broker" and verify that the root broker mapping is correct. Once you verified the physical - service address mapping is correct for all nodes, and the root broker mapping, please run this script again. Note: As the preceding warning message explains, at this time, it is important to run /opt/pdinstall/edit_topology.sh to start the topology editor. In the topology editor, for each node, select Edit a node, and click OK. This action creates the required VCS configuration file on each node. For example, failovers might have occurred between the time of the last disaster recovery backup and this restore. If so, the restore topology files have invalid host and service address mappings for the nodes of the storage pool.

180 180 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data Correct these inconsistencies and run the DR_Restore_all script again. 10 (Conditional) Verify the NIC identifiers and (conditionally) correct the NIC identifiers. Perform this step if you reinstalled PDOS on any nodes. When you reinstall PDOS, the NIC identifiers can be different from the NIC identifiers that existed in the previous PDOS installation. Perform the following steps to verify and, if necessary, correct the NIC identifiers: Log into the storage pool authority node and type the following command to start the topology editor: # /opt/pdinstall/edit_topology.sh Use the topology editor to check and, if necessary, correct the NIC identifier for the public NIC. The topology editor displays information about the public NIC below the service addresses. You can change information about the public NIC in the topology editor. Open file /Storage/etc/topology_nodes.ini. Search for the following keywords: firstprivate and secondprivate. Verify that the ethn identifiers for firstprivate and secondprivate point to the correct NICs. (Conditional) Correct the ethn identifiers in the topology_nodes.ini file. Perform this step if the ethn identifiers differ from those that existed when PDOS was installed initially. Running the DR_Restore_all script - phase 2 (NetBackup, clustered recovery) In phase 2, the script restores the files from the backup. The DR_Restore_all.sh script initiates a dialog with you. You need to answer the questions that the script displays. To restore a storage pool 1 Examine the topology information the script displays and specify the nodes you want to restore. The script reads the topology file and presents a display like the following example:

181 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data 181 STORAGE POOL TOPOLOGY Node IP Address Services spa mbe mbs cr nbu cr Node number(s): 1 The preceding example shows the topology that the script can restore in this disaster recovery operation. Examine this information for accuracy, and specify all nodes for restore. Use commas to separate the node numbers. After the reinstall is complete, the script performs the following actions: Remounts the mount points. Restores all the data on the failed nodes. Restores all the databases on all the nodes. Restores any removed data. A data removal job might have been run since the last time the databases were backed up. For this reason, the script also restores the removed data on the nodes that did not fail. This action synchronizes the databases and data. 2 Respond to queries from the script regarding passwords. The restore process can take hours to complete. As the script runs, you might be asked to specify the system passwords for the remote (or local) nodes. This prompt occurs early in the process during secure shell (SSH) authentication. 3 (Conditional) Respond to the queries from the upgrade patches. Refer to the README files that came with the upgrade patches for specific details about the queries. Respond no to creating jobs for upgrading agents. At the end of the upgrade installation, the script prompts you to encrypt the topology.ini file. Answer no at this time to continue. You will have a chance to encrypt the topology.ini file at the end of the disaster recovery process.

182 182 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data 4 When the restore is complete, answer the prompts about encryption of the topology.ini file. For example: Would you like to encrypt the topology.ini file? [Yn]:y Encrypting /opt/pdinstall/topology.ini enter aes-256-cbc encryption password: xxxx Verifying - enter aes-256-cbc encryption password: Type the password that you use for the storage pool configuration wizard. 5 Observe the completion message. When the operation completes successfully, the script displays the following message: Disaster recovery complete Finishing the restore (NetBackup, clustered recovery) The following procedure explains the tasks you need to perform to finish the restore. To finish the restore 1 On each content router node, log on as root. 2 Run the following command to change DEREF to Yes. # /opt/pdcr/bin/crcontrol -m DEREF=Yes 3 Repeat the following steps until you have run this command on all content router nodes: Step 1 Step 2

183 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data (Conditional) Run the following script on the storage pool authority node to upgrade the security protocol: # /opt/pdinstall/disable_sslv2.sh Perform this step if you ran the disable_sslv2.sh script on this storage pool at any time. The disaster recovery restore does not enable this script automatically. Symantec recommends that you run the script unless PureDisk 6.5.x storage pools need to replicate to this storage pool. 5 (Conditional) Reenable the NetBackup export engine on any nodes that hosted only a NetBackup export engine service. Perform this step only if you have a node that hosted only a NetBackup export engine service. For information about how to enable a NetBackup export engine, see the following: See About exporting data to NetBackup on page Perform a full disaster recovery backup. Make sure you perform a full disaster recovery backup before you perform any file backups or perform any incremental disaster recovery backups. Recovering a PureDisk clustered storage pool from a Samba disaster recovery backup The following procedure explains how to recover a PureDisk clustered storage pool from a disaster recovery backup that you wrote to Samba. To recover a PureDisk clustered storage pool from a Samba disaster recovery backup 1 Run the DR_Restore_all script - phase 1. See Running the DR_Restore_all script - phase 1 (Samba, clustered recovery) on page Run the DR_Restore_all script - phase 2. See Running the DR_Restore_all script - phase 2 (Samba, clustered recovery) on page Finish the restore. See Finishing the restore (Samba, clustered recovery) on page 190.

184 184 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data Running the DR_Restore_all script - phase 1 (Samba, clustered recovery) During a disaster recovery, you need to run the DR_Restore_all.sh script in two phases. In this first phase, verify host and service address mappings. If the host address and service address mappings do not match, the script exits and you need to correct the mappings. If necessary, rerun the script until the host and service address mappings match. Later, in phase 2, continue to answer the script s prompts regarding the storage pool. To verify the host and service address mappings 1 Log on to the storage pool authority node. 2 (Conditional) Make sure that the root_hash file exists on this node. Perform this step if the storage pool uses an external root broker. For more information about external root brokers, see the PureDisk Getting Started Guide and the PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide. 3 Make sure that all storage partitions are mounted. For example, use the following mount(8) command to verify the mounts: # mount grep Storage 4 Type the following command to run the disaster recovery script: # /opt/pdinstall/dr_restore_all.sh 5 Specify the method you used to back up PureDisk. For example: Please choose the method you used to do the Disaster Recovery Backup 1. NetBackup 2. Samba Share 3. Local Directory Backup Method (1 2 3): 2 6 Provide the information that PureDisk needs to mount the shared file system. For example: Please enter remote samba share (i.e. // /remoteSambaShare): //rmns1.min.boston.com/pd_drdata

185 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data Provide information about the local mount point. The local mount point is the path name of a directory on which to mount the share. If you used the DR_restore_all script in the default PureDisk location, the mount point must be /DRdata. Please enter local mount point (default: /DRdata): If appropriate, press Enter to accept the default. 8 Provide authentication information. This information includes the user name, password, and work group for Samba on the remote file server. For example: Please enter samba user name: pduser Please enter samba password: pdpwd Please enter samba workgroup: pdwgroup Please enter location to restore CR data and spool area from (default: /DRdata): 9 Type the full system path name to the disaster recovery script used to save your PureDisk data. If you used the DR_restore_all.sh script in the default PureDisk location, press Enter. If you supplied your own restore script, PureDisk does not protect it. The scripts are overwritten during a restore procedure if they remain in the default installation directory (/opt). You must write them to another directory for protection, such as /usr or /tmp. For example: Please enter full path of customized DR restore script (default: /opt/pdconfigure/scripts/support/dr_backupsamplescripts/drresto re.sh):

186 186 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data 10 Respond to the prompts regarding encryption. If you used a pdkeyutil password to enable encryption of your disaster recovery data during backup, supply the password that you specified. If you did not use pdkeyutil, type no; the script does not ask you for a password. For example: Was encryption used to do the Disaster Recovery Backup [Yn]: y Please provide the pdkeyutil pass phrase: ******* 11 Provide the full path of any upgrade patch files that need to be applied. Please provide the location of the upgrade patch tar file. For multiple patches, enter in the order they should be applied. (leave blank for none) : For example: /root/nb_pde_ tar For multiple upgrade patches that need to be applied, provide the latest that can be installed on top of the base version. Otherwise, provide in the order the patches should be applied (applicable to EEBs). Leave blank and press Enter if there are no patches to apply. Next, respond to the following prompt: Are there any more patches that need to be applied? (Yn) : Answer yes (y) to apply additional patches. Answer no (n) to continue with the disaster recovery process. 12 Type the storage pool ID for the storage pool that you want to restore. This ID is the value specified for the storagepoolid property in the topology.ini file. This value is used to retrieve the topology file. For example: Please enter Storage Pool ID: 13 Respond to the prompts regarding the topology file. Directory /Storage/etc must contain the following files: topology.ini or topology.ini.enc topology_nodes.ini

187 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data 187 If these files are not present, the script retrieves them. If topology.ini.enc is present, the script issues the following prompt for the password: topology.ini file needs to be decrypted before proceeding enter aes-256-cbc decryption password: Type the password that you use for the storage pool configuration wizard. 14 Observe the messages that the script produces and take one of the following actions: If the host and service mappings are synchronized properly with the topology on the storage pool, the script continues. Proceed to the following section: See Running the DR_Restore_all script - phase 2 (Samba, clustered recovery) on page 188. If the host and service mappings are not synchronized with the topology on the storage pool, the script issues the following message and stops: WARNING: You are running in a VCS environment. This means the topology_nodes.ini file that has just been restored may be out of date. VCS failover events could have changed the physical - service address mapping for nodes between the time the DR backup last ran and now. To verify these mappings, please run /opt/pdinstall/edit_topology.sh and select option "Edit a node" to edit all PureDisk nodes and spare nodes in your topology. Verify that for PureDisk nodes, the service address in the "Virtual IP/Hostname" entry is on the same node as the physical address in the "IP/Hostname" entry. If not, update the "IP/Hostname" entry to contain the correct physical address for the service address. Verify that for spare nodes, the "IP/Hostname" entry is really the physical address of a node that is currently acting as a spare node. Also, select the option "Configure root broker" and verify that the root broker mapping is correct. Once you verified the physical - service address mapping is correct for all nodes, and the root broker mapping, please run this script again. Note: As the preceding warning message explains, at this time, it is important to run /opt/pdinstall/edit_topology.sh to start the topology editor. In the topology editor, for each node, select Edit a node, and click OK. This action creates the required VCS configuration file on each node. For example, failovers might have occurred between the time of the last disaster recovery backup and this restore. If so, the restore topology files

188 188 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data have invalid host address and service address mappings for the nodes of the storage pool. Correct these inconsistencies and run the DR_Restore_all script again. 15 (Conditional) Verify the NIC identifiers and (conditionally) correct the NIC identifiers. Perform this step if you reinstalled PDOS on any nodes. When you reinstall PDOS, the NIC identifiers can be different from the NIC identifiers that existed in the previous PDOS installation. Perform the following steps to verify and, if necessary, correct the NIC identifiers: Log into the storage pool authority node and type the following command to start the topology editor: # /opt/pdinstall/edit_topology.sh Use the topology editor to check and, if necessary, correct the NIC identifier for the public NIC. The topology editor displays information about the public NIC below the service addresses. You can change information about the public NIC in the topology editor. Open file /Storage/etc/topology_nodes.ini. Search for the following keywords: firstprivate and secondprivate. Verify that the ethn identifiers for firstprivate and secondprivate point to the correct NICs. (Conditional) Correct the ethn identifiers in the topology_nodes.ini file. Perform this step if the ethn identifiers differ from those that existed when PDOS was installed initially. Running the DR_Restore_all script - phase 2 (Samba, clustered recovery) In phase 2, the script restores the files from the backup. The DR_Restore_all.sh script initiates a dialog with you. You need to answer the questions that the script displays. To restore a storage pool 1 Examine the topology information the script displays and specify the nodes you want to restore. The script reads the topology file and presents a display like the following example:

189 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data 189 STORAGE POOL TOPOLOGY Node IP Address Services spa mbe mbs cr nbu cr Node number(s): 1 The preceding example shows the topology that the script can restore in this disaster recovery operation. Examine this information for accuracy, and specify all nodes for restore. Use commas to separate the node numbers. After the reinstall is complete, the script performs the following actions: Remounts the mount points. Restores all the data on the failed nodes. Restores all the databases on all the nodes. Restores the removed data. A data removal job might have been run since the last time the databases were backed up. For this reason, the script also restores the removed data on the nodes that did not fail. This method synchronizes the databases and data. 2 Respond to queries from the script regarding passwords. The restore process can take hours to complete. As the process runs, you might be asked to specify the system passwords for the remote (or local) nodes. This prompt occurs early in the process during SSH authentication. 3 (Conditional) Respond to the queries from the upgrade patches. Refer to the README files that came with the upgrade patches for specific details about the queries. Respond no to creating jobs for upgrading agents. At the end of the upgrade installation, the script prompts you to encrypt the topology.ini file. Answer no at this time to continue. You will have a chance to encrypt the topology.ini file at the end of the disaster recovery process.

190 190 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data 4 When the restore is complete, answer the prompts about encryption of the topology.ini file. For example: Would you like to encrypt the topology.ini file? [Yn]:y Encrypting /opt/pdinstall/topology.ini enter aes-256-cbc encryption password: xxxx Verifying - enter aes-256-cbc encryption password: Type the password that you use for the storage pool configuration wizard. 5 Observe the completion message. When the operation completes successfully, the script displays the following message: Disaster recovery complete Finishing the restore (Samba, clustered recovery) The following procedure explains the tasks you need to perform to finish the restore. To finish the restore 1 On each content router node, log on as root. 2 Run the following command to change DEREF to Yes. # /opt/pdcr/bin/crcontrol -m DEREF=Yes 3 Repeat the following steps until you have run this command on all content router nodes: Step 1 Step 2

191 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data (Conditional) Run the following script on the storage pool authority node to upgrade the security protocol: # /opt/pdinstall/disable_sslv2.sh Perform this step if you ran the disable_sslv2.sh script on this storage pool at any time. The disaster recovery restore does not enable this script automatically. Symantec recommends that you run the script unless PureDisk 6.5.x storage pools need to replicate to this storage pool. 5 (Conditional) Reenable the NetBackup export engine on any nodes that hosted only a NetBackup export engine service. Perform this step only if you have a node that hosted only a NetBackup export engine service. For information about how to enable a NetBackup export engine, see the following: See About exporting data to NetBackup on page Perform a full disaster recovery backup. Make sure you perform a full disaster recovery backup before you perform any file backups or perform any incremental disaster recovery backups. Recovering a PureDisk clustered storage pool from a third-party product disaster recovery backup The following procedure explains how to recover a PureDisk clustered storage pool from a disaster recovery backup that you wrote to a third-party product. To recover a PureDisk clustered storage pool from a third-party product disaster recovery backup 1 Run the DR_Restore_all script - phase 1. See Running the DR_Restore_all script - phase 1 (third-party, clustered recovery) on page Run the DR_Restore_all script - phase 2. See Running the DR_Restore_all script - phase 2 (third-party, clustered recovery) on page Finish the restore. See Finishing the restore (third-party, clustered recovery) on page 198.

192 192 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data Running the DR_Restore_all script - phase 1 (third-party, clustered recovery) During a disaster recovery, you need to run the DR_Restore_all.sh script in two phases. In this first phase, verify host and service address mappings. If the host address and service address mappings do not match, the script exits and you need to correct the mappings. If necessary, rerun the script until the host address and service address mappings match. Later, in phase 2, continue to answer the script s prompts regarding the storage pool. To verify the host and service address mappings 1 Log on to the storage pool authority node. 2 (Conditional) Make sure that the root_hash file exists on this node. Perform this step if the storage pool uses an external root broker. For more information about external root brokers, see the PureDisk Getting Started Guide and the PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide. 3 Make sure that all storage partitions are mounted. For example, use the following mount(8) command to verify the mounts: # mount grep Storage 4 Type the following command to run the disaster recovery script: # /opt/pdinstall/dr_restore_all.sh 5 Specify the method you used to back up PureDisk. For example: Please choose the method you used to do the Disaster Recovery Backup 1. NetBackup 2. Samba Share 3. Local Directory Backup Method (1 2 3): 3 6 Provide information about where the data to be restored is located. Press Enter to accept the defaults for the following prompts: Please enter location to restore metadata from (default: /DRdata): Please enter location to restore CR data and spool area from (default: /DRdata):

193 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data Type the full system path name to the disaster recovery script used to save your PureDisk data. If you used the DR_Restore_all.sh script in the default PureDisk location, press Enter. If you supplied your own restore script, remember that the scripts are not protected. The scripts are overwritten during a restore procedure if they remain in the default installation directory (/opt). To prevent this problem, you must place them in another directory for protection (for example, in /usr or /tmp). For example: Please enter full path of customized DR restore script (default: /opt/pdconfigure/scripts/support/dr_backupsamplescripts/drresto re.sh): 8 Respond to the prompts regarding encryption. If you used a pdkeyutil password to enable encryption of your disaster recovery data during backup, supply the password that you specified. If you did not use pdkeyutil, type no; the script does not ask you for a password. Was encryption used to do the Disaster Recovery Backup [Yn]: y Please provide the pdkeyutil pass phrase: *******

194 194 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data 9 Provide the full path of any upgrade patch files that need to be applied. Please provide the location of the upgrade patch tar file. For multiple patches, enter in the order they should be applied. (leave blank for none) : For example: /root/nb_pde_ tar For multiple upgrade patches that need to be applied, provide the latest that can be installed on top of the base version. Otherwise, provide in the order the patches should be applied (applicable to EEBs). Leave blank and press Enter if there are no patches to apply. Next, respond to the following prompt: Are there any more patches that need to be applied? (Yn) : Answer yes (y) to apply additional patches. Answer no (n) to continue with the disaster recovery process. 10 Type the storage pool ID for the storage pool that you want to restore. This name is the value specified for the storagepoolid property in the topology.ini file. This value is used to retrieve the topology file. For example: Please enter Storage Pool ID: 11 Respond to the prompts regarding the topology file. Directory /Storage/etc must contain the following files: topology.ini or topology.ini.enc topology_nodes.ini If these files are not present, the script retrieves them. If topology.ini.enc is present, the script issues the following prompt for the password: topology.ini file needs to be decrypted before proceeding enter aes-256-cbc decryption password: Type the password that you use for the storage pool configuration wizard. 12 Observe the messages that the script produces and take one of the following actions:

195 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data 195 If the host and service mappings are synchronized properly with the topology on the storage pool, the script continues. Proceed to the following section: See Running the DR_Restore_all script - phase 2 (third-party, clustered recovery) on page 196. If the host and service mappings are not synchronized with the topology on the storage pool, the script issues the following message and stops: WARNING: You are running in a VCS environment. This means the topology_nodes.ini file that has just been restored may be out of date. VCS failover events could have changed the physical - service address mapping for nodes between the time the DR backup last ran and now. To verify these mappings, please run /opt/pdinstall/edit_topology.sh and select option "Edit a node" to edit all PureDisk nodes and spare nodes in your topology. Verify that for PureDisk nodes, the service address in the "Virtual IP/Hostname" entry is on the same node as the physical address in the "IP/Hostname" entry. If not, update the "IP/Hostname" entry to contain the correct physical address for the service address. Verify that for spare nodes, the "IP/Hostname" entry is really the physical address of a node that is currently acting as a spare node. Also, select the option "Configure root broker" and verify that the root broker mapping is correct. Once you verified the physical - service address mapping is correct for all nodes, and the root broker mapping, please run this script again. Note: As the preceding warning message explains, at this time, it is important to run /opt/pdinstall/edit_topology.sh to start the topology editor. In the topology editor, for each node, select Edit a node, and click OK. This action creates the required VCS configuration file on each node. For example, failovers might have occurred between the time of the last disaster recovery backup and this restore. If so, the restore topology files have invalid host and service address mappings for the nodes of the storage pool. Correct these inconsistencies and run the DR_Restore_all.sh script again. 13 (Conditional) Verify the NIC identifiers and (conditionally) correct the NIC identifiers. Perform this step if you reinstalled PDOS on any nodes. When you reinstall PDOS, the NIC identifiers can be different from the NIC identifiers that existed in the previous PDOS installation.

196 196 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data Perform the following steps to verify and, if necessary, correct the NIC identifiers: Log into the storage pool authority node and type the following command to start the topology editor: # /opt/pdinstall/edit_topology.sh Use the topology editor to check and, if necessary, correct the NIC identifier for the public NIC. The topology editor displays information about the public NIC below the service addresses. You can change information about the public NIC in the topology editor. Open file /Storage/etc/topology_nodes.ini. Search for the following keywords: firstprivate and secondprivate. Verify that the ethn identifiers for firstprivate and secondprivate point to the correct NICs. (Conditional) Correct the ethn identifiers in the topology_nodes.ini file. Perform this step if the ethn identifiers differ from those that existed when PDOS was installed initially. Running the DR_Restore_all script - phase 2 (third-party, clustered recovery) In phase 2, the script restores the files from the backup. The DR_Restore_all.sh script initiates a dialog with you. You need to answer the questions that the script displays. To restore a storage pool 1 Examine the topology information that the script displays and specify the nodes you want to restore. The script reads the topology file and presents a display like the following example: STORAGE POOL TOPOLOGY Node IP Address Services spa mbe mbs cr nbu cr Node number(s): 1 The preceding example shows the topology that the script can restore in this disaster recovery operation. Examine this information for accuracy, and specify all nodes for restore. Use commas to separate the node numbers.

197 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data 197 After the reinstall is complete, the script performs the following actions: Remounts the mount points. Restores all the data on the failed nodes. Restores all the databases on all the nodes. Restores the removed data. A data removal job might have been run since the last time the databases were backed up. In that case, the script also restores the removed data on the nodes that did not fail. This method synchronizes the databases and data. 2 Respond to queries from the script regarding passwords. The restore process can take hours to complete. As the script runs, you might be asked to specify the system passwords for the remote (or local) nodes. This prompt occurs early in the process during SSH authentication. 3 (Conditional) Respond to the queries that are displayed by the upgrade patches. Refer to the README files that came with the upgrade patches for specific details about the queries. Respond no to creating jobs for upgrading agents. At the end of the upgrade installation, the script prompts you to encrypt the topology.ini file. Answer no at this time to continue. You will have a chance to encrypt the topology.ini file at the end of the disaster recovery process. 4 When the restore is complete, answer the prompts about encryption of the topology.ini file. For example: Would you like to encrypt the topology.ini file? [Yn]:y Encrypting /opt/pdinstall/topology.ini enter aes-256-cbc encryption password: xxxx Verifying - enter aes-256-cbc encryption password: Type the password that you use for the storage pool configuration wizard. 5 Observe the completion message. When the operation completes successfully, the script displays the following message: Disaster recovery complete

198 198 Disaster recovery for clustered storage pools Running the DR_Restore_all_script to recover the data Finishing the restore (third-party, clustered recovery) The following procedure explains the tasks you need to perform to finish the restore. To finish the restore 1 On each content router node, log on as root. 2 Run the following command to change DEREF to Yes. # /opt/pdcr/bin/crcontrol -m DEREF=Yes 3 Repeat the following steps until you have run this command on all content router nodes: Step 1 Step 2 4 (Conditional) Run the following script on the storage pool authority node to upgrade the security protocol: # /opt/pdinstall/disable_sslv2.sh Perform this step if you ran the disable_sslv2.sh script on this storage pool at any time. The disaster recovery restore does not enable this script automatically. Symantec recommends that you run the script unless PureDisk 6.5.x storage pools need to replicate to this storage pool. 5 (Conditional) Reenable the NetBackup export engine on any nodes that hosted only a NetBackup export engine service. Perform this step only if you have a node that hosted only a NetBackup export engine service. For information about how to enable a NetBackup export engine, see the following: See About exporting data to NetBackup on page Perform a full disaster recovery backup. Make sure you perform a full disaster recovery backup before you perform any file backups or perform any incremental disaster recovery backups.

199 Chapter 8 Storage pool authority replication (SPAR) This chapter includes the following topics: About storage pool authority replication (SPAR) Activating the local storage pool Enabling SPAR backups Running a SPAR policy manually Restoring from a SPAR backup About storage pool authority replication (SPAR) PureDisk enables you to replicate storage pool authority configuration information from an all-in-one local storage pool to a main storage pool. This type of replication is called storage pool authority replication (SPAR). You can enable both SPAR and disaster recovery backups. If you enable both, you can choose the disaster recovery method you want to use. For more information about when to use SPAR and when to use disaster recovery backup, see the following: See Disaster recovery strategies on page 201. See About disaster recovery backup procedures on page 99.

200 200 Storage pool authority replication (SPAR) About storage pool authority replication (SPAR) Note: The main storage pool can be configured as a clustered storage pool. However, Symantec does not support SPAR for clustered local storage pools. When SPAR runs under cluster control, a failover moves all node functions to a passive node. However, the failover does not move the SPAR feature that you enabled on the original local storage pool authority node. Figure 8-1 shows an example PureDisk environment with two storage pools. Figure 8-1 SPAR example SP_local PureDisk agent SPAR backup SPAR restore SP_main SP_local is a small, local storage pool in Duluth and SP_main is in a main office in Minneapolis. SPAR is implemented to back up system information from SP_local to SP_main. The information in this section uses this example environment. SPAR s main benefit is that SPAR enables you to restart a storage pool and begin backing up data soon after a disaster. A SPAR recovery is best performed in the following circumstance: You have an all-in-one local storage pool that is down completely. You want to restore all your user information, data selection definitions, backup policies, and system policies. This data includes all the user data and storage pool data that enables client backups. This data does not include the backup data or backup metadata. You want to be able to start backing up data again very quickly. SPAR differs from the other disaster recovery methods because SPAR does not recover your backup data or metadata. A full disaster recovery can take several hours or days, depending on how much data you backed up. SPAR recoveries are faster. After a SPAR recovery, PureDisk sees the local storage pool as if it were a newly configured storage pool. The backups you perform immediately after a SPAR recovery are all full backups. When you enable both comprehensive disaster recovery backups and SPAR, you can choose the recovery method you want to use. If you perform a SPAR recovery, you can use full disaster recovery methods to restore your file data and metadata

201 Storage pool authority replication (SPAR) About storage pool authority replication (SPAR) 201 to an alternate storage pool. You need an alternate storage pool in this circumstance. A full disaster recovery to a local storage pool destroys all the data that you backed up between the SPAR recovery and the time you performed the full disaster recovery. Note: If you experience replication job performance degradation and you have a high-latency communication network between the two storage pools, you can possibly improve performance by changing some default TCP/IP settings. For more information, see "About changing TCP/IP settings to improve replication job performance" in the PureDisk Best Practices Guide, Chapter 5: Tuning PureDisk. Disaster recovery strategies Symantec recommends that you back up your PureDisk environment on a regular basis. PureDisk supports the following methods for disaster recovery: Complete disaster recovery. This method uses a PureDisk policy that sends data to NetBackup or scripts to back up and restore storage pool specifications, file data, and file metadata. For more information about complete disaster recovery, see the following: See About disaster recovery backup procedures on page 99. Storage pool authority replication (SPAR). This method backs up and restores storage pool specifications, but not file data or metadata. Along with disaster recovery backups, you can replicate all your data selections to another storage pool. You can use the replicated data selections to restore a PureDisk storage pool. If you replicate all data selections to another storage pool, you can limit data loss after a disaster. For information about data replication, see the following: See About data replication on page 59. The method that is best for your site depends on your configuration, practices, and disaster recovery goals. Table 8-1 shows the characteristics of these two methods.

202 202 Storage pool authority replication (SPAR) Activating the local storage pool Table 8-1 Disaster recovery method comparison Characteristic Data restored Estimated restore time Storage pool type Restore goal Complete disaster recovery Storage pool metadata, file data, and file metadata. Depends on the amount of data. This step can take hours. Any type of storage pool. You want to restore the storage pool and all backups. SPAR Storage pool metadata. SPAR restores take much less time than a complete disaster recovery. The protected storage pool must be an all-in-one, single-node, unclustered storage pool. You want to restore the storage pool and back up the clients as quickly as possible. State of restored storage pool Restores your storage pool to the state it was in when the last disaster recovery backup was run. Restores your storage pool users, accounts, data selections, policies, and all other storage pool configuration information. This method does not restore any file data or file metadata. After you restore, you need to run backups for all your clients. Old or changed data is no longer available. Activating the local storage pool To implement the SPAR method successfully, the local storage pool must be a client to the main storage pool. The following procedure explains how to register the local storage pool as the main storage pool s client. This procedure also configures the other aspects of SPAR. To register the local storage pool 1 In the local storage pool s Web UI, click Settings > Topology. 2 In the left pane, select a local storage pool. 3 In the right pane, click Activate SPA Replication.

203 Storage pool authority replication (SPAR) Activating the local storage pool Complete the display that appears. The display requests the same information that you need to supply when you install an agent on the storage pool authority. These fields are as follows: Login Password Host name (FQDN) The root user s login on the main storage pool authority node. The root user s password on the main storage pool authority node. The fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of the main storage pool. Example: SP_Main.acme.com Storage pool name Binary Location The local storage pool s host name. Type this name as you want it to appear in the main storage pool s Web UI. The path to the Linux agent software on the main storage pool. This agent software is the same as the agent software that you use for all other Linux PureDisk clients. You can specify an IP address or a host name to identify the main storage pool. In this field, do not specify the actual file in which the Linux agent installation software resides. You specify the file name in the next field, Binary. Example: Assume that you installed the agent software packages in the default location on SP_Main. The default location is as follows: /opt/pdweb/htdocs/download/linux_clients For the Binary Location field, use the fully qualified domain name (FQDN) and specify the following path: Binary The name of the file that includes the Linux agent installation software on the main storage pool. The Binary Location field s content points to this file name. For example, pdagent-linux_2.6_x run.

204 204 Storage pool authority replication (SPAR) Enabling SPAR backups Path Dump Path The path to which you want to install the Linux agent on the local storage pool. For example, /opt/spar. Caution: Do not specify the path to the primary server agent on the local storage pool. For example, if the server agent is in its default location, do not specify /opt in this field. This path is the location of the primary server agent on the local storage pool. Do not overwrite this file. The path to a dump directory on the local storage pool. PureDisk writes the local storage pool s system information to this location before it copies the system information to the main storage pool. Do not specify an existing directory. Specify only a unique directory that SPAR can use exclusively. Each time the SPAR policy runs, it overwrites this directory. When you perform a SPAR recovery, it restores the last version written. For example, /Storage/SPAR. 5 Record the information you specified and keep it in a safe place. If the local storage pool goes down, you need the information you specified on this screen to perform a restore. All the arguments to these fields appear on the main storage pool, except for the Path field. If a disaster occurs, you can restore a downed local storage pool faster if you have this information recorded and stored safely. 6 Click Save. After you click Save, PureDisk runs a job to activate the local storage pool as a client to the main storage pool. After activation, the status of the two storage pools is as follows: The local storage pool appears in the main storage pool s list of clients. Two agents reside on the local storage pool. The first is the local storage pool s primary server agent. The second is an agent that connects the local storage pool to the main storage pool. Enabling SPAR backups PureDisk includes a system policy for SPAR. The following procedure explains how to enable this policy. PureDisk creates the jobs to run this policy on the local site.

205 Storage pool authority replication (SPAR) Enabling SPAR backups 205 To enable SPAR backups 1 On the local storage pool, click Manage > Policies. 2 In the right pane, under the Storage Pool Management Policies category, click the plus (+) sign to the left of SPA Replication. 3 Select System policy for SPA replication. 4 Complete the required information in the General tab. See Completing the General tab for a SPA Replication on page Complete the required information in the Scheduling tab. See Completing the Scheduling tab for a SPA Replication policy on page Complete the required information in the Parameters tab. See Completing the Parameters tab for a SPA Replication policy on page Click Save. Completing the General tab for a SPA Replication This tab lets you name and define the policy. To complete the General tab 1 (Optional) Type a new name for this policy in the Name field. You do not have to rename this policy. 2 Select Enabled or Disabled. This setting has the following options: If you select Enabled, PureDisk runs the policy according to the schedule in the Scheduling tab. If you select Disabled, PureDisk does not run the policy according to the schedule in the Scheduling tab. This selection is the default. You might use Disabled to stop this policy from running this policy during a system maintenance period. Then, you would not need to enter

206 206 Storage pool authority replication (SPAR) Running a SPAR policy manually information in the Scheduling tab to first suspend and later reenable this policy. 3 Select times in the Escalatewarningafter or the Escalateerrorandterminate after drop-down boxes. These times specify the elapsed time before PureDisk sends a message. PureDisk can notify you if a policy does not complete its run within a specified time. For example, you can configure PureDisk to send an message to an administrator if a policy does not complete in an hour. If you select either of these options, create a policy escalation action. The action defines the message, defines its recipients, and associates the escalation action with the policy. For more information about policy escalations, see the PureDisk Backup Operator's Guide. Completing the Scheduling tab for a SPA Replication policy From this tab, use the drop-down lists to specify when the policy is to run. To specify the schedule Specify the schedule details that define how frequently you want the policy to run. Completing the Parameters tab for a SPA Replication policy Examine the information on this tab and correct it if necessary. To examine the parameters tab 1 (Conditional) Correct the information in these fields. Perform this step only if the fields contain incorrect information. For example, if the URL, login, or password for the main storage pool ever change, correct the information in this tab. 2 Click Save. Running a SPAR policy manually You can run a SPAR policy according to a schedule. You can also use the following procedure to run a SPAR policy manually.

207 Storage pool authority replication (SPAR) Restoring from a SPAR backup 207 To run a SPAR policy 1 On the local storage pool, click Manage > Policies. 2 In the left pane, under Storage Pool Management Policies, click the plus (+) sign to the left of SPA Replication. 3 Select system policy for spa replication. 4 (Conditional) Enable the policy. You have to enable a policy before you can run it. In the right pane, click Enabled and Save. 5 In the right pane, click Run Policy. 6 Examine the output. Restoring from a SPAR backup The RestoreSPAAIO.php command restores system data from a SPAR backup and re-establishes the client connection between the local storage pool and the main storage pool. To restore system data from a SPAR backup 1 Gather the information you need to perform a SPAR restore. 2 Install the PureDisk Operating System (PDOS) on the local storage pool. For more information about how to install PDOS, see the PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide. 3 Use the storage pool configuration wizard to configure the PureDisk storage pool. Configure the storage pool software on the local storage pool. For more information about how to use the storage pool configuration wizard, see the PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide Perform the following steps if the storage pool software does not function: Remove the storage pool software s previous upgrade package. The following is the directory you need to remove: /etc/puredisk Configure new storage pool software. During this reconfiguration, the installer proposes again a (new) random storage pool ID. Do not accept this proposed storage pool ID. Instead, specify the original storage pool ID. If you do not specify the original

208 208 Storage pool authority replication (SPAR) Restoring from a SPAR backup storage pool ID, the storage pool becomes inoperable after you perform the SPAR restore. When you configure the new storage pool software, specify the same passwords that you specified during the previous configuration. 4 Deactivate the agent in the main storage pool that performed the SPAR. Perform the following steps: Log in to the main storage pool s Web UI. In the left pane, click Settings > Topology. Select the PureDisk agent that represents the PureDisk storage pool. In the right pane, click Deactivate Agent. 5 Retrieve the information you used to configure SPAR initially. See To register the local storage pool on page 202. This procedure advises you to record the configuration information and store it in a safe place. Retrieve this information now. You need this information and some additional information to create the restore command. A later step in this procedure directs you to use the RestoreSPAAIO.php command to perform the restore. You can obtain information about many of this command s arguments from the main storage pool. Other information, however, such as the install path to the SPAR client on the local storage pool is not recorded anywhere in PureDisk. If you have this information before you begin, the restore command is easier to specify.

209 Storage pool authority replication (SPAR) Restoring from a SPAR backup Log in to the local storage pool as root. 7 Use the RestoreSPAAIO.php command to perform the restore. The restore command restores the local storage pool s system information and re-establishes the local storage pool s client relationship to the main storage pool. Refer to Table 8-2. The figure shows the arguments to the RestoreSPAAIO.php command. You can type the arguments in any order, but the arguments must match your original configuration. The following example shows the command with all the required arguments: # /opt/pdag/bin/php /opt/pdspa/cli/restorespaaio.php --ip SP_Main.acme.com --login root --password root --hostname SP_local-Duluth --binary pdagent-linux_2.6_x run --binaryloc --agentlocation /opt/spar --agentid 2 --dsid 2 --dumpdir /Storage/SPAR/ About the RestoreSPASIO command The following sections explain the arguments to the RestoreSPAAIO.php command. Required arguments for the RestoreSPAAIO command Table 8-2 shows the required arguments for the RestoreSPAAIO.php command. Table 8-2 Argument --agentid Required RestoreSPAAIO.php command arguments Meaning Local storage pool authority s agent ID as registered on the main storage pool. To obtain this information, perform the following steps on the main storage pool: 1 Click Manage > Agent. 2 In the right pane, select the local storage pool s agent icon. 3 Note the number in the Storage Pool ID field. --agentlocation Full path to the directory in which the agent resided for the previous SPAR backup. You specified this information in the Path field when you configured SPAR.

210 210 Storage pool authority replication (SPAR) Restoring from a SPAR backup Table 8-2 Argument --binary --binaryloc --dsid Required RestoreSPAAIO.php command arguments (continued) Meaning File name for agent installer on the main storage pool. You specified this information in the Binary field when you configured SPAR. Path to the agent installer on the main storage pool. Do not include the file name at the end of this path. You specified this information in the Binary Location field when you configured SPAR. Data selection ID (DSID) of the data selection that PureDisk used to do the previous SPAR backup. To obtain this information, perform the following steps on the main storage pool: 1 Click Manage > Agent. 2 In the left pane, click the plus sign (+) to the left of the local storage pool s agent icon. 3 Select the SPAR data selection. 4 Note the number in the ID field. --dumpdir --hostname --ip --login --password -d or --debug -s or --silent -v or --verbose Full path to the restore directory. Specify the same dump directory that you used for the previous SPAR backup. Host name of the local storage pool as it appeared in the main storage pool s Web UI for the previous SPAR backup. FQDN, host name, or IP address of the main storage pool. Specify a resolvable identifier. Root user login to the main storage pool. Root user password for the main storage pool. (Optional) Runs command in debug mode. (Optional) Runs command in silent mode. (Optional) Runs command in verbose mode. Optional arguments for the RestoreSPAAIO command Table 8-3 shows the optional arguments to the RestoreSPAAIO.php command.

211 Storage pool authority replication (SPAR) Restoring from a SPAR backup 211 Table 8-3 Parameter --info --help Optional RestoreSPAAIO.php command arguments Argument (Optional) Displays PHP information at run time. (Optional) Displays command help information. Upgrading PureDisk with SPAR enabled You must follow a strict order during the upgrade process if your environment includes two or more storage pools with SPAR enabled between them. The order is as follows: First, upgrade the storage pool from which you replicate the storage pool authority. Second, upgrade the storage pool to which you replicate the storage pool authority. For more information about upgrades, see the PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide.

212 212 Storage pool authority replication (SPAR) Restoring from a SPAR backup

213 Chapter 9 Reports This chapter includes the following topics: About reports Permissions and guidelines for running and viewing reports Reports for a running job About policies and workflows Obtaining detailed job reports About Data mining reports Enabling a data mining policy Running a data mining policy manually Obtaining data mining policy output - the data mining report Obtaining data mining policy output - the Web service report Web service reports About Dashboard reports Central storage pool authority reports About reports The following explain how to run and display PureDisk reports: See Permissions and guidelines for running and viewing reports on page 214. See Reports for a running job on page 215. See About policies and workflows on page 216.

214 214 Reports Permissions and guidelines for running and viewing reports See Obtaining detailed job reports on page 218. See About Data mining reports on page 233. See Enabling a data mining policy on page 234. See Running a data mining policy manually on page 236. See Obtaining data mining policy output - the data mining report on page 236. See Obtaining data mining policy output - the Web service report on page 239. See Web service reports on page 242. See About Dashboard reports on page 249. See Central storage pool authority reports on page 254. Permissions and guidelines for running and viewing reports The following factors determine whether a user can create reports and view report results with the permissions that they possess: Permission to create reports. A user needs Report permission and View permission to create reports. A user in the reporters group and a user with Report permission can run reports and can run data mining policies. You can assign users to the reporters group only at the World level. A user needs View permission at the storage pool level to retrieve data mining reports. Permission to view reports. View permission determines how much information that user can see in a data mining report. For example, users with View permission at the storage pool level can view information for the entire storage pool in data mining reports. If a user has View permission only at the client level, they can see only that client's information in a data mining report. Permission to create reports about central storage pools. A user needs Central Report permission at the storage pool level. Root user permission. If a user logs in as root, PureDisk displays the Reports tab. Only root users can view the reports displayed from this tab. Other factors can affect the availability of reporting data. For example, if you restored a storage pool, wait about 15 minutes before accessing report data.

215 Reports Reports for a running job 215 For more information about permissions, see the PureDisk Client Installation Guide. Reports for a running job When you examine a running job, you can see the steps that PureDisk takes when it runs. These individual steps are called workflow steps. The following sections show how to examine a running job and explain the workflow steps. For information about job reports for PureDisk deduplication jobs, see the PureDisk Deduplication Option Guide. For information about examining a running job or restarting a job, see the following: See Examining a running job on page 215. See Restarting a backup job on page 216. Examining a running job The following procedure explains how to view job step information for running jobs and for jobs that are in the queue. To obtain a report on a running or queued job 1 Click Manage > Agents. 2 In the left pane, select the storage pool. 3 In the right pane, select More Tasks and pull down Job Steps Report. PureDisk displays the Job Steps Report. 4 Click one of the tabs to see different aspects of a job s progress. For example, click Job Steps with Problems to see job steps. Click one of the numbers in the Job ID column to display more details about a specific job. For more information about the job details displays, see the following: See Obtaining detailed job reports on page 218. If a data lock password is enabled on this agent, the Files and Errors tabs prompt you for the password when you attempt to view them. For more information about the data lock password, see the PureDisk Client Installation Guide.

216 216 Reports About policies and workflows Restarting a backup job If a backup job fails or if you abort a job, you can use the following procedure to restart the job. To restart a job 1 Click Monitor > Jobs. 2 (Optional) Narrow your search for the job you are interested in. If there are many jobs in the right pane, you can narrow your search through one of the following: Specify information in the Look for field, pull down an object type from the in field, and click Find now to display only a subset of the default information. You can specify a string of characters to search for in the Look for field. For example, you can specify the full name of a client in the Lookfor field, and then you can select Agent Name from the in pull-down menu. In the left pane, select a category from the View Jobs By pull-down menu. 3 Near the top of the right pane, click Restart job. About policies and workflows When you click Manage > Policies, the right pane of the Web UI displays backup jobs, restore jobs, and other jobs. The following describe policies and workflows: See Types of workflows on page 216. See Workflows in policies on page 217. Types of workflows A workflow is a collection of steps that PureDisk completes to accomplish a task. A policy is a special kind of workflow. To create a policy manually, or to edit a policy, click Manage > Policies. The PureDisk Web UI categorizes policies and workflows as follows: Backup Policies Data Management Policies Storage Pool Management Policies Restore Workflows Miscellaneous Workflows

217 Reports About policies and workflows 217 Workflows in policies If you upgraded from a previous PureDisk release, you might also see the Legacy Workflows category with one or more workflows beneath it. For example, this category might contain the following workflows: 6.5 Data selection removal workflow 6.5 Rerouting Workflow 6.5 MBDataMining workflow Whether the Web UI displays any legacy workflows depends on the presence of existing workflows at the time of your upgrade. If you ran a data mining policy before you applied an upgrade, the workflow appears in the Web UI after the upgrade is installed. You can examine the outcomes of these workflows, or you can delete them. A workflow step defines a PureDisk action. PureDisk accomplishes its work by running a series of workflow steps. The individual workflow steps are predefined, and each performs a specific action. When you use PureDisk to perform a backup, a restore, or any other kind of task, PureDisk completes that task by running several workflows. A policy defines a data management or maintenance action. Within a backup policy, for example, the schedule determines when the policy runs, the agents and the data selections to back up, and other various parameters. PureDisk can stop processing after a timeout. A timeout can occur in two different ways: In a workflow step. PureDisk permits internal workflow steps to run only for a limited time. In a policy. The General tab of a backup policy lets you specify the amount of time a policy can run before PureDisk terminates the policy run. PureDisk s internal watchdog monitors workflow steps. In the case of a backup policy, the watchdog issues a message if the backup does not complete within the specified backup window. The watchdog also issues messages for individual workflow steps or policies that terminate. You can configure event monitoring to notify you of these occurrences. For more information about how to configure events, see the PureDisk Backup Operator s Guide.

218 218 Reports Obtaining detailed job reports Obtaining detailed job reports The following procedure explains how to obtain a detailed job report. This report returns information on a per job basis. By analyzing this report, you can determine how efficiently PureDisk operates in your environment. To obtain a report for a job that has finished 1 Click Monitor > Jobs. 2 (Optional) Specify information in the Look for field, pull down an object type from the in field, and click Find now to display only a subset of the default information. You can specify a string of characters to search for in the Look for field. For example, you can specify the full name of a client in the Look for field, and then you can select Agent Name from the in pull-down menu. 3 In the right pane, in the Job ID column, click the number that corresponds to the job you want to examine. An informational window appears with the several tabs. For example, the pop-up window includes the following tabs for a backup job: General Details Statistics Files Errors Job log Includes the job s execution status, whether there were any errors during the job s run, and when the job commenced. Shows the status for each specific part of a job s run. On this tab, you can see how PureDisk breaks a job apart for processing. Provides information on the number of processed files and the number of bytes of data that was transferred between the client and the content router. Lists the files that the job backed up. Includes whether PureDisk backed up the files successfully, the client upon which the file resided, and the name of the file. Lists the files with the errors that PureDisk encountered when it processed the job. Shows the job step output. 4 (Optional) Click one of the following tabs to perform additional actions: Restart job Stop job gracefully Stop job immediately

219 Reports Obtaining detailed job reports 219 Delete job General tab for a Job Details report The General tab summarizes a job s activity. It includes information about whether the job completed successfully, the number of errors, the start time, and the finish time. Details tab for a Job Details report The Details tab shows the job steps PureDisk performed to complete the job. Select a workflow step in the left column to view information about that step in the right column. Some job steps generate more information than PureDisk can display in the right pane of the Details tab. To control the amount of information that appears in the right column, click the drop-down menu that appears directly above the upper-left corner of the right column. Then, specify a different amount of information to display. If the information in the right column exceeds the space allowed, PureDisk writes the following message at the end of the output: PureDisk truncated this log file. You can download the complete log file from the Job log tab. If you see this message, perform the procedure in the following section: See Examining lengthy job logs on page 233. Statistics tab for a Job Details report PureDisk provides information on this tab for backup jobs, restore jobs, replication jobs, and PDDO jobs. Statistics for a backup job The statistics for a backup job pertain to all supported file types that were included in the backup. The PureDisk Backup Operator s Guide lists the file types that PureDisk supports. The Statistics tab for a backup job does not show information about unsupported files or files that cannot be backed up at all. Unsupported file types are files that are not supported by PureDisk, such as reparse points on Windows. Examples of the file types that cannot be backed up are doors and sockets on UNIX systems.

220 220 Reports Obtaining detailed job reports For efficiency reasons, PureDisk always uploads files smaller than 16 KB to the content router, even if they are already stored on the content router. Consequently, the backup statistics can be different from what you expect if you back up many files smaller than 16 KB. For example, the data reduction factor can be lower than expected, or the number of bytes transferred can be higher than expected. Table 9-1 contains information about how to interpret the statistics in a backup job. Table 9-1 Lines in the Statistics tab for a backup job Statistic or heading Meaning Data Reduction: Global data reduction savings Global data reduction factor The percentage of source data bytes that did not have to be transmitted to the content routers because of data reduction. Higher numbers correlate to more efficiency. The total number of bytes for the files that PureDisk backed up divided by the amount of bytes transferred to the content routers. Higher numbers correlate to more efficiency. Data Uniqueness: Unique files and folders backed up The number of backed up files that were globally unique, after global data reduction, before segmentation, and before compression. This statistic is the number of files that are unique in the group of data selections under consideration. The files themselves are considered, but optimization through segmentation is not considered. For example, if a file resides on three different clients, PureDisk stores the file only once and counts it only once in this number. At the segment level, however, PureDisk performs more optimization. A file segment can be present in more than one file, and PureDisk stores that segment only once. Unique bytes backed up The total number of bytes in the backed up files that were globally unique. This statistic is the accumulated size of the unique files transferred to the content routers. When encryption or compression are enabled, it is the accumulated size of the encrypted or compressed unique files. The reported value also includes all overhead bytes necessary for headers, alignment, and so on. The values in the Sourcebytesbackedup and Unique bytes backed up fields are not always identical even if all files backed up are unique.

221 Reports Obtaining detailed job reports 221 Table 9-1 Lines in the Statistics tab for a backup job (continued) Statistic or heading Meaning Source selection: Files selected on source Bytes selected on source Files new on source Bytes new on source Files modified on source Bytes modified on source Files not modified on source Bytes not modified on source Files deleted on source Bytes deleted on source The number of files that meet the data selection inclusion and exclusion rules. Pertains to regular files only. This number does not include the number of special files, such as symbolic links or device special files. The total number of bytes for the files that meet the data selection inclusion and exclusion rules. Pertains to regular files only. This number does not include the volume of special files, such as symbolic links or device special files. The number of selected files that are new compared to the previous backup run. Pertains to regular files only. This number does not include the number of special files, such as symbolic links or device special files. The total number of bytes for the selected files that are new compared to the previous backup run. Pertains to regular files only. This number does not include the volume of special files, such as symbolic links or device special files. The number of selected files that were modified compared to the previous backup run. Pertains to regular files only. This number does not include the number of special files, such as symbolic links or device special files. The total number of bytes for the selected files that were modified compared to the previous backup run. This number does not include the volume of special files, such as symbolic links or device special files. The number of files that were not modified since the last backup ran. The total number of bytes for the files that remained unchanged since the last backup ran. The number of files that were deleted since the last backup ran. The total number of bytes for the files that were deleted since the last backup ran. Network:

222 222 Reports Obtaining detailed job reports Table 9-1 Lines in the Statistics tab for a backup job (continued) Statistic or heading Backup speed Bytes transferred Meaning The rate at which PureDisk backed up the total volume of source data. If only a small amount of unique data needs to be backed up, this number is higher. If the source data has never been backed up to PureDisk before, the number is lower. The total number of bytes of unique data that were transferred to the storage pool s content routers after segmentation and compression. Includes data related to special files. For special files, PureDisk stores a special data object on the content routers to be able to restore these files. Protected Data: Source files backed up Source bytes backed up The number of selected files that were backed up correctly. This is the sum of new, modified, and nonmodified files that are correctly backed up and do not contain errors. The total number of bytes for the selected files that were backed up correctly. For information about the relationship of this field to the Unique bytes backed up field, see the Unique bytes backed up field description. Source files with errors Source bytes with errors The number of selected files that PureDisk could not back up. The total number of bytes for the selected files that PureDisk could not back up. Time: Start date/time Stop date/time Backup time duration The date and time that the job started. The date and time that the job ended. The amount of time that elapsed between when the job started and when the job ended. Notes: Table 9-1 shows the statistics for one job. However, the data mining reports, when run at the storage pool level, show the data reduction factor for the storage pool. The storage pool data reduction factor in the data mining reports represents the volume of all data ever backed up to that storage pool, in bytes, that is retained and currently available for restores versus the amount of bytes consumed on the content routers.

223 Reports Obtaining detailed job reports 223 The storage pool data reduction factor differs from the statistics because the statistics in the table are generated for only one job. More information is available about the data mining reports. See About Data mining reports on page 233. Several factors can affect the Bytes transferred statistic. The data selection may contain a huge number of small files or have very small segment sizes. In these cases, the bytes transferred can be much larger than the on-source values. The following additional information applies to this statistic: If the backup includes only special files, the "...on source" statistics show 0 files selected because there were no regular files to back up, but the Bytes transferred statistic can be a large number. Compression has the greatest effect on the Bytes transferred statistic. If you enable compression, the Bytes transferred statistic is usually lower than the Bytes selected on source statistic. The Bytes transferred statistic might be higher if the data being transferred cannot be compressed. Data that cannot be compressed includes data that is already compressed such as movies, files in JPEG format, files in MP3 format, or files in ZIP format. For files that are already compressed, the compression is ineffective and might result in a slight increase of the data to be transferred. For a repeated backup, the Bytes transferred statistic should be much lower than Bytes selected on source. The Bytes selected on source statistic is the sum of all bytes present in the data selection. For an initial backup, if you disable compression, the Bytes transferred statistic is usually higher than the Bytes selected on source statistic because of the overhead in the internal data format. The rate of data change on the client affects the Bytes transferred statistic. The Bytes selected on source represents the sum of all bytes in the entire data selection. If the data change rate is 100% (for example, if all files changed or it is a first-time backup) and you disable compression, the Bytes transferred statistic is always higher. If the change rate is less than 100%, Bytes transferred statistic is lower. The file size affects the Bytes transferred statistic. As a performance enhancement, PureDisk always transfers files for which the content of files is smaller than the segment size. In this case, PureDisk does not perform a prior-existence check on the content routers. This is in contrast to backups for file content that is larger than the segment size. PureDisk always performs a prior-existence check for files that are larger than the segment size.

224 224 Reports Obtaining detailed job reports Consequently, if a data selection consists mainly of files smaller than the segment size, the number of bytes transferred can be higher than expected. For example, if PureDisk backs up an identical set of files on two different clients, it would be logical to expect that the bytes transferred would be low for the second client because the files already exist on the content router. This is not the case, however. Segmentation size and file size affect the Bytes transferred statistic. PureDisk uses a special data format to store the data on its content routers. This data format has a per-segment overhead of a 22-byte header, a 12-byte trailer, 16 bytes per block of 32 KB of data, and up to 7 padding bytes. The padding bytes enable PureDisk to align the data according to its internal data format, which requires data to be aligned on an 8-byte boundary. For example, if you have a segment of exactly 128 KB, the total data overhead is 34 + (4 * 16) = 96 bytes. As another example, if the segment is 128 Kb - 1 byte long, the total data overhead is padding byte = 97 bytes. If the segment is smaller than 32 KB, the number of overhead bytes can vary between ( ) = 48 and ( ) = 55 bytes. If you disable encryption, the header is 14 bytes long instead of 22. Statistics for a restore job Table 9-2 shows how to interpret the information in the Statistics tab for a restore job. Table 9-2 Statistic Lines in the Statistics tab for a restore job Meaning Restore Selection: Total files Bytes total The total number of files and directories that PureDisk restored. The Directorycount statistic reports the number of directories restored. The total number of bytes in all files and directories that PureDisk restored. Target:

225 Reports Obtaining detailed job reports 225 Table 9-2 Statistic Files new on target Lines in the Statistics tab for a restore job (continued) Meaning The number of new files that reside on the client after the restore is complete. If you restore to the original directory and overwrite the original files, PureDisk reports that there are no new files. If you restore the files to a different directory for the first time, PureDisk reports that all the files you restored are new files on the client. Bytes new on target Files modified on target Bytes modified on target Files unmodified on target Bytes unmodified on target The number of bytes occupied by the restored files. This statistic is the number of bytes consumed by the files that are noted in the Files new statistic. The number of files that are different on PureDisk storage when compared to the target directory for the restore. This number counts the number of files on the client source that have different content when compared to the files you restored. The number of bytes occupied by the files in the Files modified on target statistic. The number of files that are identical on both PureDisk storage and on the target directory. For example, if this value is 0, this means that all the files you restored have changed since they were backed up. The number of bytes occupied by the files in the Files unmodified on target statistic. Network: Bytes received by agent Average restore rate The number of bytes actually restored. If nothing has been replaced, the value is 0. The average transfer rate during the transmission of unique data. Data Uniqueness: Unique items restored Unique items received The number of items that PureDisk wrote to the target computer. This statistic is a count of the number of files, directories, and special files. It includes only the items that were different on the target computer as compared to PureDisk storage. If nothing has changed, this value is 0. Number of unique items that were included in this restore job. The count excludes directories and special files.

226 226 Reports Obtaining detailed job reports Table 9-2 Statistic Lines in the Statistics tab for a restore job (continued) Meaning Restore Failures: Error count Files with errors Bytes with errors ACL errors The number of errors that were generated during the restore. The number of files that generated errors during the restore and could not be restored. The total number of bytes represented in files that had an error and could not be restored. For example, if a 1-MB file could not be restored due to an error, this statistic is 1 MB. The total number of errors encountered when the job attempted to restore ACLs. This value can be nonzero for a variety of reasons. For example, the following conditions, and others, can cause ACL restore errors: An ACL could not be found on storage A parent directory does not allow restore of ACLs. Verification failures The number of files for which verification failed. This field is applicable only if you backed up the files with verification enabled. Restore Successes: Directory count The number of all unique directories in the path to each file that PureDisk restored. Even if you restore only one file from a directory, PureDisk includes that directory in this statistic For example, assume that you restore the file1 and file2 from the following paths: /a/b/c/file1 /a/b/d/file2 In this case, the Directory count is 4. Devices Symbolic links Hard links (Linux and UNIX systems only) The number of block and character device files restored. This value is always 0 on Windows systems. (Linux and UNIX systems only) The number of symbolic links restored. This value is always 0 on Windows systems. (Linux and UNIX systems only) The number of hard links restored. This value is always 0 on Windows systems.

227 Reports Obtaining detailed job reports 227 Table 9-2 Statistic ACL Lines in the Statistics tab for a restore job (continued) Meaning (Windows systems only) The number of ACLs restored. This value is always 0 on Linux and UNIX systems. Verification successes The number of files for which verification succeeded. This field is applicable only if you backed up the files with verification enabled. Time: Start date/time Stop date/time Restore time duration The date and time that the job started. The date and time that the job ended. The amount of time that elapsed between when the job started and when the job ended. Statistics for a replication job Table 9-3 shows how to interpret the information in the Statistics tab for a replication job. Most of the statistics in the table are also reported for a PDDO replication job; the table notes exceptions. Table 9-3 Statistic Lines in the Statistics tab for a replication job Meaning Source selection: Items new in source data selection Bytes new in source data selection Items modified in source data selection Bytes modified in source data selection Items deleted in source data selection The number of data objects replicated to the target storage pool that were not included in a previously replicated PureDisk backup. The number of bytes replicated to the target storage pool that have not been included in a previous PureDisk backup. The number of data objects replicated that have been modified since the previous replication. This number counts the number of data objects on the source that have different content when compared to the files you replicated at an earlier time. The number of bytes occupied by the data objects in the Items modified in source data selection statistic. The number of data objects that were deleted from the source data selection since the last replication.

228 228 Reports Obtaining detailed job reports Table 9-3 Statistic Lines in the Statistics tab for a replication job (continued) Meaning Bytes deleted in source data selection The number of bytes occupied by the data objects in the Items deleted in source data selection statistic. This statistic is the total number of bytes deleted from the source data selection. Not included in PDDO replication statistics. Errors: Items with replication errors The number of data objects that generated errors during the replication process. Not included in PDDO replication statistics. Bytes with replication errors The number of bytes of data in the Items with replication errors statistic that generated errors during the replication process. Not included in PDDO replication statistics. Replicated Data: Items replicated Bytes replicated The number of files, directories, or data items replicated to the target storage pool. The number of bytes replicated to the target storage pool. Network: Bytes transferred The number of bytes transferred to the target storage pool. This statistic includes bytes included in any overhead that was needed for the transfer. Time: Start date/time Stop date/time Replication time duration The date and time that the job started. The date and time that the job ended. The amount of time that elapsed between when the job started and when the job ended. Statistics for a PDDO backup job Table 9-4 shows how to interpret the information in the Statistics tab for a PDDO job.

229 Reports Obtaining detailed job reports 229 Table 9-4 Statistic Meaning Lines in the Statistics tab for a PDDO job Data Reduction: Global data reduction saving The percentage of source data bytes that did not have to be transmitted to the content routers because of data reduction. Higher numbers correlate to more efficiency. Source Selection: Bytes scanned during backup The total number of bytes scanned by PDDO from the backup. Media server cache hit percentage Network: Bytes transferred to content router Time: The percentage of backup data that PureDisk found in the media server's cache. The number of bytes of new, nondeduplicated data that PureDisk sent to the content router for storage. Start date/time Stop date/time Backup time duration The date and time that the job started. The date and time that the job ended. The amount of time that elapsed between when the job started and when the job ended. Files tab for a Job Details report For a backup job, the Files tab provides information on the files that PureDisk backed up from the client.

230 230 Reports Obtaining detailed job reports If a data lock password is enabled on an agent, this tab prompts you for the password when you attempt to view it. For more information about the data lock password, see the PureDisk Client Installation Guide. The following information appears on this tab: Agent Data selection Folder File Size Modified Download The name of the agent from which the data selection was backed up. The name of the data selection. Specifies the folder that contains the file on the client. The name of the file that PureDisk backed up. The size of the file that PureDisk backed up. The date and time that the file was last modified. Also see the Enable changedetection backup feature. For more information about specific backup features, see the PureDisk Backup Operator s Guide. A link you can click to restore the file. This screen contains no information when PureDisk does not back up any files. This situation is possible for an incremental backup if files have not changed. Tip: You can restore a file by clicking a Download link in the Download column. Errors tab for a Job Details report For a backup job, the Errors tab provides a list of files that PureDisk did not back up due to reasons such as the file was open for editing or the file was deleted in between job steps. This tab does not display error messages that indicate why the job failed. If a data lock password is enabled on an agent, PureDisk prompts you for the password when you attempt to view the Errors tab. For more information about the data lock password, see the PureDisk Client Installation Guide. Job log tab for a Job Details report The Job log tab displays information about job processing and any errors PureDisk encountered during processing. The PureDisk agent cannot upload log files that are larger than 5 MB. PureDisk truncates log files that are larger than 5 MB.

231 Reports Obtaining detailed job reports 231 Job log tab for a backup job Job logs are available for different types of jobs. If errors occur during the backup, PureDisk displays message codes in the Job log tab. Table 9-5 shows the message codes that PureDisk displays for a backup job. Table 9-5 Message codes for a backup job Error code Description QUEUED SUCCESS ERROR RUNNING READY_TO_RUN SUCCESS_WITH_ERRORS ABORTED_BY_USER ABORTED_BY_WATCHDOG RUNNING_HOLD INCOMPLETE UNKNOWN_LOCALLY NONEXISTING_LOCALLY UNREADABLE_LOCALLY UNWRITABLE_LOCALLY LOCKED_LOCALLY Remark The job is queued. The job step completed successfully. The job step failed. The job step is running. A job step is preparing to run. The job step ran successfully but encountered nonfatal errors. The user stopped the job step. The PureDisk watchdog stopped the job step after the job step timed out. The job is running, but the current job step is on hold. Not all required fields were calculated. This local file type is not supported. File not found. Access denied. An ACL does not permit read access. On a restore operation, this message means that the disk is full. Otherwise, this means that a parent directory does not allow write access. The file is locked by another process. Applies to Windows clients only.

232 232 Reports Obtaining detailed job reports Table 9-5 Message codes for a backup job (continued) Error code Description CR_CONNECTION_ERROR NONEXISTENT_ON_SP UNRETRIEVABLE_FROM_SP UNWRITABLE_TO_SP UNKNOWN_CR_ERROR MB_CONNECTION_ERROR NONEXISTENT_ON_MB UNRETRIEVABLE_FROM_MB UNWRITABLE_TO_MB UNKNOWN_MB_ERROR Remark Could not connect to the content router. PureDisk could not find the metadata for this file in the metabase engine. One of the following conditions is present: A read error occurred on the storage pool. The data selection does not allow read permission. This agent does not have read permission. One of the following conditions is present: A write error occurred on the storage pool. The data selection does not allow write permission. This agent does not have write permission. This error is the generic content router error. For more information, see the agent or the server logs. Unused. See 201. See 202. See 203. Pdweb not running. Generic error log. For more information, see the agent or server logs. Job log tab for a restore job The job log of a restore job can contain the following misleading message for the getfiles step: Bandwidth limit set to 0 KB/s via agent configuration

233 Reports About Data mining reports 233 The value of 0 indicates that no limit is set. It does not mean that no data is transferred. Examining lengthy job logs PureDisk truncates job logs that exceed its maximum display length. If this happens, perform the following procedure to display job information in another window. To examine lengthy job output 1 Click the Job log tab. 2 Click Download Whole Job Log. This link appears above the upper-right corner of the right column. 3 On the pop-up window that appears, specify the interface you want to use to display the file. About Data mining reports For the display method you choose, you might need to insert return characters because the return characters might not appear correctly in the display. In some cases, the job log might exceed the display length for this window. The job log includes log information at the beginning and at the end, which enables you to see what happened when the job started and when the job finished. In this case, PureDisk deletes repetitive information from the middle of the job log report. A data mining policy collects information about all the files in a PureDisk storage pool. When you run a data mining policy from the Web UI, PureDisk gathers information from the metabase server for all data selections. It then summarizes the information in a table. This report uses data mining to extract and present information in report format and in XML format. A data mining report displays information as of the last time a data mining policy ran. If you move an agent to a different department, the data mining reports reflect the updated department after you run a data mining policy again. For example, if you move agent AGENT1 from location OLD to location NEW and then click Data Mining Report, AGENT1 appears in OLD. If you run a data mining policy and then click Data Mining Report, AGENT1 appears in NEW. PureDisk provides a default data mining policy, but you must edit this policy and enable it.

234 234 Reports Enabling a data mining policy The following describe how to edit, run, manipulate, and read data from data mining policies: See Enabling a data mining policy on page 234. See Running a data mining policy manually on page 236. See Obtaining data mining policy output - the data mining report on page 236. See Obtaining data mining policy output - the Web service report on page 239. Enabling a data mining policy The following procedure explains how to enable a data mining policy. To enable a data mining policy 1 Click Manage > Policies. 2 In the left pane, under Storage Pool Management Policies, click the plus (+) sign to the left of Data Mining. 3 Select System policy for data mining. 4 Complete the General tab. See Completing the General tab for a data mining policy on page Complete the Scheduling tab. See Completing the Scheduling tab for a data mining policy on page Complete the Parameters tab. See Completing the Parameters tab for a data mining policy on page Click Save. Completing the General tab for a data mining policy The General tab lets you name and define the policy. To complete the General tab 1 (Optional) Type a new name for this policy in the Policy name field. You do not have to rename this policy. 2 Select Enabled or Disabled. This setting has the following options: If you select Enabled, PureDisk runs the policy according to the schedule in the Scheduling tab.

235 Reports Enabling a data mining policy 235 If you select Disabled, PureDisk does not run the policy according to the schedule in the Scheduling tab. This value is the default. For example, you can use Disabled if you want to stop running this policy during a system maintenance period, but you do not want to enter information in the Scheduling tab to suspend, and then reenable, this policy. 3 (Optional) Specify an escalation procedure. Select times in the Escalatewarningafter or the Escalateerrorandterminate after drop-down boxes to specify the elapsed time before PureDisk sends a message. PureDisk can notify you if an update does not complete within a specified time. For example, you can configure PureDisk to send an message to an administrator if a policy does not complete in an hour. If you select either of these options, create a policy escalation action that defines the message, defines its recipients, and associates the escalation action with the policy. For more information, see the PureDisk Backup Operator s Guide. Completing the Scheduling tab for a data mining policy From the Scheduling tab, use the drop-down lists to specify when the policy is to run. To specify the schedule Specify the schedule details that define how frequently you want the policy to run. Completing the Parameters tab for a data mining policy From the Parameters tab, use the radio button to specify the format of your report. To specify a report format Choose a report format of Light (default) or Full. These settings specify whether PureDisk includes file extension information in the reports. File extensions include.mp3,.doc,.txt, and so on. When the Light setting is in effect, the report does not contain file extensions. When the Full setting is in effect, the report includes all file extension information. The Full setting also increases the load on the storage pool, particularly the metabase engines.

236 236 Reports Running a data mining policy manually Running a data mining policy manually PureDisk creates one job for each metabase engine when you run a data mining policy. The Web UI displays information for each job when it runs. To run a data mining policy 1 Click Manage > Policies. 2 In the left pane, under Storage Pool Management Policies, click the plus sign (+) to the left of Data Mining. 3 Select System policy for data mining. 4 (Conditional) Enable the policy. You must enable a policy before you can run it. If the policy is disabled, on the General tab, click Enabled and click Save. 5 In the right pane, click Run Policy. 6 Examine the output. For information about how to examine the output, see one of the following: See Obtaining data mining policy output - the data mining report on page 236. See Obtaining data mining policy output - the Web service report on page 239. Obtaining data mining policy output - the data mining report A data mining policy gathers statistics about the files in a storage pool. You can use the following procedure to tabulate the statistics into a report. To retrieve information for a storage pool or data selection from a data mining policy 1 Make sure that you have the correct permissions to create and view reports. The data mining report shows only the data selections a user is entitled to view. See Permissions and guidelines for running and viewing reports on page Make sure that a data mining policy has been run. You can run the policy manually or you can configure PureDisk to run the policy on a schedule. For information about how to run a data mining policy, see the following: See Running a data mining policy manually on page 236.

237 Reports Obtaining data mining policy output - the data mining report Click Manage > Agents. 4 In the left pane, select the scope of the data mining report. You can obtain a data mining report on one of the following levels: A storage pool A location A department A client A data selection 5 Click Data Mining Report in the right pane. 6 (Optional) Click Select in history in the upper right corner. Perform this step if you want to view a data mining report from an earlier data mining workflow. By default, PureDisk displays data mining information from the most recent run of the data mining workflow. The following list explains some of the information in the data mining report: Total Storage Pool Volume Used The volume of backup data, in bytes, on the content routers in this storage pool. The information in this field is updated every 15 minutes. The output in this field might not account for the data that was added to storage during the last 15 minutes. During installation, the agents are stored on the storage pool. Consequently, if you run a data mining policy before any backups have run, the report indicates that a small amount of storage is already in use. Total Storage Pool Data Reduction Factor The volume of all data ever backed up to this storage pool, in bytes, that is retained and currently available for restores divided by the global storage pool volume. See Interpreting the storage pool data reduction factor on page 238. Total size on source Storage pool volume used The volume of files, in bytes, in this data selection on the source client. This number includes all versions of all files. The estimated data volume, in bytes, stored on the storage pool s content routers for this data selection. This statistic is the source size of this data selection divided by the storage pool data reduction factor.

238 238 Reports Obtaining data mining policy output - the data mining report Interpreting the storage pool data reduction factor The data mining report shows the storage pool data reduction factor. This value shows how much disk space the files consume on the storage pool content routers relative to the amount of disk space that the files consumed on primary storage. In the data mining reports display, the storage pool data reduction factor can be 1 or a value greater than 1, as follows: If this factor is 1, the backed up source files consume the same capacity on the storage pool content routers as on the source clients. If this factor is greater than 1, this value is the factor by which PureDisk has reduced the source volume through data reduction before it writes to the content routers. If this factor is less than 1, the backed up data consumes more space on the content routers compared to the backed up volume of the source files. This can be due to compression and encryption overhead. For example, assume that PureDisk backed up eight 10-MB files within a data selection. The eight files had identical content, and this particular content is new to the storage pool. PureDisk determines that these identical files all have the same fingerprint. Because they all have the same fingerprint, PureDisk stores only one copy on the content routers. The statistics are as follows: The volume on source for this data selection is 8 X 10 MB = 80 MB (source size). The volume on the storage pool for this data selection is 10 MB (storage pool size). The storage pool data reduction factor is 80/10 MB = 8. Effect of compression on data reduction If you enable compression for a data selection, the volume on the content routers is even lower, and the storage pool data reduction factor is higher. Effects of segmentation on data reduction Segmentation affects data reduction because data reduction assumes that the segment size for a file is the same every time you back it up. PureDisk might have to re-segment a very large file every time it is backed up if the file grows or shrinks between backups. If the file is re-segmented over multiple backups, data reduction is less efficient.

239 Reports Obtaining data mining policy output - the Web service report 239 A smaller segment size can yield better data reduction rates. However, performance can degrade because of the higher maintenance costs involved in managing a larger number of segments. A larger segment size can yield better performance, but the data reduction rate can degrade. Larger segments can also use a higher amount of disk space. PureDisk considers the following factors when it segments the file: The default segment size for the data selection type or the segment size you specify. The maximum number of segments allowed, which is 5,120 segments. The maximum segment size allowed, which is 50 MB. Obtaining data mining policy output - the Web service report After you run a data mining policy, you can display your output through the data mining Web service. For information on how to obtain a data mining report, see the following: See Obtaining data mining policy output - the data mining report on page 236. To obtain a data mining Web service report, type the following into your browser: Table 9-6 shows the arguments in the URL. Table 9-6 Argument url login pwd Arguments in the data mining Web services reports Meaning The URL for the storage pool authority. For example: The storage pool authority administrator login. For example: root. The storage pool authority administrator password. For example: mypwd.

240 240 Reports Obtaining data mining policy output - the Web service report Table 9-6 Argument num Arguments in the data mining Web services reports (continued) Meaning The number of the data mining policy run that you want to display in report format. PureDisk retains the last 10 runs of the data mining workflow. For example, if you want to display the most recent policy run, specify 1. If you want to display information from the policy run just before the most recent, specify 2. If you ran the data mining policy every day for the last 10 days and you want to display the oldest run, specify 10. To verify the report output with data mining policy runs, compare the timestamp in the header of the report with the times of your data mining policy runs. When you run the Web service report to obtain data mining output, you retrieve information on all data selections in the storage pool. You cannot narrow the report to include information for only one data selection. Information about how to report on only one data selection is available. See Obtaining data mining policy output - the data mining report on page 236. For example, assume that you type the following URL: getreport&runid=1 PureDisk returns output as follows: This XML file does not appear to have any style information associated with it. The document tree is shown below. -<MBDatamining TimeStamp=" :20:02 PM"> <filtre>*</filtre> -<mbe_range_statistics> -<mbe id="1"> -<dataselection id="4" dataselectionname="desktop" agentid="2" agentname="travelscrabble" locationid="0" departmentid="0" locationname="unknown location" departmentname="unknown department" ostype="10"> <location name="unknown location"/> <department name="unknown department"/> <sizeonsource_dataselection unit="bytes"> </sizeonsource_dataselection> <sizeonstoragepool_dataselection unit="bytes"> </sizeonstoragepool_dataselection>

241 Reports Obtaining data mining policy output - the Web service report 241 -<ACCESSRANGE> -<item id="-1 day"> <amountoffiles>13</amountoffiles> <totalfilesize> </totalfilesize> </item> -<item id="1 day-1 week"> <amountoffiles>16</amountoffiles> <totalfilesize> </totalfilesize> </item> -<item id="1 month-1 year"> <amountoffiles>45</amountoffiles> <totalfilesize> </totalfilesize> </item> -<item id="1 week-1 month"> <amountoffiles>4</amountoffiles> <totalfilesize> </totalfilesize> </item> </ACCESSRANGE> -<MODRANGE> -<item id="+1 year"> <amountoffiles>10</amountoffiles> <totalfilesize> </totalfilesize> </item> -<item id="-1 day"> <amountoffiles>2</amountoffiles> <totalfilesize> </totalfilesize> </item> -<item id="1 day-1 week"> <amountoffiles>1</amountoffiles> <totalfilesize>207</totalfilesize> </item> -<item id="1 month-1 year"> <amountoffiles>61</amountoffiles> <totalfilesize> </totalfilesize> </item> -<item id="1 week-1 month"> <amountoffiles>4</amountoffiles> <totalfilesize> </totalfilesize> </item> </MODRANGE> -<SIZERANGE> -<item id="0-10kb"> <amountoffiles>20</amountoffiles>

242 242 Reports Web service reports <totalfilesize>26942</totalfilesize> </item> -<item id="100kb-1mb"> <amountoffiles>19</amountoffiles> <totalfilesize> </totalfilesize> </item> -<item id="10kb-100kb"> <amountoffiles>29</amountoffiles> <totalfilesize> </totalfilesize> </item> -<item id="10mb-100mb"> <amountoffiles>4</amountoffiles> <totalfilesize> </totalfilesize> </item> -<item id="1mb-10mb"> <amountoffiles>6</amountoffiles> <totalfilesize> </totalfilesize> </item> </SIZERANGE> -<TYPES> -<item id="0"> <amountoffiles>78</amountoffiles> <totalfilesize> </totalfilesize> </item> </TYPES> </dataselection> </mbe> </mbe_range_statistics> -<dataselectionlist_sis_reporting> <global_storagepool_vol unit="bytes"> </global_storagepool_vol> <global_storagepool_sis> </global_storagepool_sis> </dataselectionlist_sis_reporting> <MBDataminingHistory/> </MBDatamining> Web service reports To use the Web service reports you must type a URL into your browser to navigate to a Web service page. On this Web service page you enter login and password information, as well as a request for a specific report. The reports display in XML

243 Reports Web service reports 243 format. You can import the XML output to a spreadsheet. See the following section for more information: See Importing report output into a spreadsheet on page 249. Caution: For security reasons, use a Web browser that uses POST requests, not GET requests, when retrieving Web service reports. For example, Microsoft Internet Explorer does not use POST requests and is not secure. You can also follow your spreadsheet s instructions for importing the XML data. For example, the following URL contains login information, password information, and a request for information about successful job runs: Note: The Web UI URL parameters are case sensitive. Make sure you type them exactly as shown in this chapter. The ampersand (&) character acts as a separator for the fields in the URL. The bracket characters in the following sections [ ] represent optional URL fields. The following sections describe reports that you can obtain through the Web services: See Job status Web service reports on page 243. See Dashboard Web service reports on page 246. See Obtaining data mining policy output - the Web service report on page 239. Job status Web service reports You can obtain the following types of job status reports from the Web service reporting tool: ws_getsuccessfuljobs.php ws_getpartialjobs.php ws_getfailedjobs.php Information about jobs that exit successfully. Information about jobs that exited with a status of Partial success. Information about jobs that exited with a status of Failed. The URL format for a Web service report on job statuses is as follows:

244 244 Reports Web service reports Table 9-7 shows the arguments in the URL. Table 9-7 Argument url web_service Arguments in the job status Web services reports Meaning The URL for the storage pool authority. For example: Specifies the type of Web service. The job status reports generate information about successful, partially completed, and failed jobs. Type one of the following: ws_getsuccessfuljobs.php ws_getpartialjobs.php ws_getfailedjobs.php login pwd filter The storage pool authority administrator login. For example: root. The storage pool authority administrator password. For example: mypwd. (Optional) One or more filters. If you specify a filter, the report displays only the data that matches the filter. If you specify more than one filter, use the ampersand (&) character to separate each filter. The filter names are case sensitive. See Table 9-8 on page 244. Table 9-8 shows the filters you can specify on a Web service URL for the job status reports. Table 9-8 Filter Filters for job status reports Meaning locationname=name departmentname=name Returns only jobs from the specified location. For example: Brussels. Returns only jobs from the specified department. For example: hr.

245 Reports Web service reports 245 Table 9-8 Filter fromjobid=id Filters for job status reports (continued) Meaning Returns only jobs that have a job ID that is equal to or greater than the job ID you specify. To find a job ID, click Details in the right pane for a job that has finished. The ID is on the General tab. For example: 465. fromdate=mm-dd-yyyy todate=mm-dd-yyyy workflowname=name Returns only jobs that started on or after the specified date. For example: Returns only jobs that ended on or before the specified date. For example: Returns only jobs for a particular workflow. To see the list of possible values for name, click Manage>Policies and observe the left pane of the Web UI. This pane shows the list of possible policies and workflows. Specify the policy or workflow name as shown in the Web UI. Examples: Data Removal MS Exchange Backup Note: Specify the workflow name exactly as shown in the Web UI. The name is case sensitive. For example, assume that you want to examine statistics for restore jobs. You can enter the following URL: wname=files and Folders Restore The following shows partial output: <?xml version="1.0" encoding="iso "?> - <jobs> - <job> <jobid>2</jobid> <agentid> </agentid> <agentname>spa</agentname> <locationname>my location</locationname> <departmentname>my department</departmentname> <executionstatusid>2</executionstatusid> <executionstatusname>success</executionstatusname>

246 246 Reports Web service reports <workflow>restore Workflow</workflow> <scheduledstarttime> </scheduledstarttime> <startdate> </startdate> <finishdate> </finishdate> <dataselectionid>2</dataselectionid> <dataselectionname>reroute</dataselectionname> <statistics /> </job> - <job>... <jobid>4</jobid> <agentid> </agentid> <agentname>spa</agentname> <locationname>my location</locationname> <departmentname>my department</departmentname> <executionstatusid>2</executionstatusid> <executionstatusname>success</executionstatusname> <workflow>restore Workflow</workflow> <scheduledstarttime> </scheduledstarttime> <startdate> </startdate> <finishdate> </finishdate> <dataselectionid>2</dataselectionid> <dataselectionname>reroute</dataselectionname> <statistics /> </job> The preceding output has been truncated at the end for inclusion in this manual. If you run a report that contains information about backup jobs, the information PureDisk returns contains the same statistics that you can obtain from clicking Data Mining Report in the left pane after a data mining workflow was run. Dashboard Web service reports This dashboard report includes status information for all PureDisk client agents, server agents, and services in the storage pool. This report includes all the information that PureDisk generates for the dashboard reports. See About Dashboard reports on page 249. You can write an application to parse or extract pieces of information from this report s output and show that in a Web page as a custom dashboard. The information for this report is not generated in real time. PureDisk refreshes the

247 Reports Web service reports 247 data every 15 minutes. The timestamp is shown at the beginning of the XML report. The report is formatted in XML. The URL format is as follows: &action=getdashboard Note: Type the preceding URL on one continuous line. Table 9-7 shows the arguments in the URL. Table 9-9 Argument url login pwd type Arguments in the Web services reports Meaning The URL for the storage pool authority. For example: The storage pool authority administrator login. For example: root. The storage pool authority administrator password. For example: mypwd. The type of record on which you want to filter. Specify agent. id To obtain this number for an agent, complete the following steps: Click the Manage > Agent. In the left pane, select an agent. In the right pane, click Agent Dashboard. Depending on the agent you choose, you might need to pull down More Tasks and select Agent Dashboard. Visually inspect the right pane to obtain the agent number from the Agent ID field. Tip: Obtain this id number before you start to type the URL for the Web service report. If you begin to type the report URL into a browser s address field, and have to click in the PureDisk Web UI to retrieve this id information, you lose the information you typed into the address field. Alternatively, you can also retrieve the id in a different window. For example, assume that you want to obtain a dashboard Web service report for an agent. You can enter the following URL: pe=agent&filterid=3&action=getdashboard

248 248 Reports Web service reports The following shows partial output: <DashBoard TimeStamp=" :43:37"> <StoragePoolID>33</StoragePoolID> <Name>valhalla</Name> <Description/> <Location id="1">mn</location> <SystemDS id="1">system DS for STP 33</SystemDS> <SelectedAgent/> <SelectedLocation/> <SelectedDepartment/> - <Agents> - <Agent id=" "> <ID> </ID> <IsServerAgent>1</IsServerAgent> <HostName> </HostName> <Description/> <OSVariant id="">not available</osvariant> <OSExtensions/> <Status id="2">active</status> <IPAddress> </IPAddress> <OS id="20">linux</os> <Version> </Version> <Department id="1">qe</department> <Location id="1">mn</location> <MetabaseEngine id="1" agentid=" "> </metabaseengine> <Controller id="1" agentid=" "> </controller> <ConnectionStatus>Connected</ConnectionStatus> - <ConnectionDetails> <FromIP> </FromIP> <SessionID>pdagent</SessionID> <Sent unit="mb">45.11</sent> <Received unit="mb">1.34</received> <Version/> </ConnectionDetails> - <Jobs> - <Job id="77">

249 Reports About Dashboard reports 249 <JobID>77</JobID> <AgentID> </AgentID> <Workflow id="13500">maintenance</workflow> <Policy id="8">system policy for Maintenance</Policy> <PolicyRunID>28</PolicyRunID> <Scheduled> :20:01</Scheduled> <Start> :20:03</Start> <Stop> :20:23</Stop> <Status id="2">success</status> </Job> </Jobs> <JobSteps/> - <Statistics id=" " TimeStamp=" :30:01" xml:base="/storage/var/stats_ xml"> -... The preceding output has been truncated at the end for inclusion in this manual. Importing report output into a spreadsheet You can import the XML formatted output from a PureDisk Web service report into a spreadsheet, such as a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet. These instructions are written in general terms. For more information, see your spreadsheet s documentation. To import Web service data into a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet 1 Use your Web browser to save the output as an XML file. 2 Import the data into your spreadsheet. For example, in Microsoft Excel, specify Data>ImportExternalData>Import Data. When it prompts you, specify the file to which you saved the XML output. About Dashboard reports Dashboards provide quick reports on system status and activity. These reports are status reports on node capacity, storage pool activity, and agents. The following sections describe how to obtain these reports:

250 250 Reports About Dashboard reports See Displaying the Capacity dashboard on page 250. See Displaying the Activity dashboard on page 251. See Displaying the Server agent dashboard on page 252. See Displaying the Client agent dashboard on page 253. Dashboard reports are available when a central reporting storage pool authority is installed. See Central storage pool authority reports on page 254. Displaying the Capacity dashboard The capacity dashboard shows information about total and used capacity on the content router and metabase engine. For a content router, this dashboard shows the total amount of space available to the content router in /Storage/data, the amount of used disk space, and the number of data segments already stored on the content router. For a metabase engine, this report shows the amount of disk space used by the latest version records only, by all version records, and the percentage of disk space used. PureDisk generates and updates the information for the capacity dashboard every 15 minutes. Therefore, if you check the capacity dashboard immediately after a backup completes, the information in the display might not reflect the conditions that result from that backup.

251 Reports About Dashboard reports 251 To display the capacity dashboard 1 Click Settings > Topology. 2 In the left pane, select the storage pool. 3 In the right pane, click Capacity Dashboard. The following figure shows an example capacity dashboard. Displaying the Activity dashboard The activity dashboard contains information about the PureDisk services that are running on all of the nodes in your storage pool. To refresh the data in this dashboard, press function key F5.

252 252 Reports About Dashboard reports To display the activity dashboard 1 Click Settings > Topology. 2 In the left pane, select the storage pool. 3 In the right pane, click Activity dashboard. The following figure shows an example activity dashboard. Displaying the Server agent dashboard The server agent dashboard shows current activity on the server agents that reside on the storage pool nodes. It displays information about the last completed job, all current jobs, and all current job steps. To refresh the data in this dashboard, press function key F5.

253 Reports About Dashboard reports 253 To display the server agent dashboard 1 Click Settings > Topology. 2 In the left pane, select the storage pool. 3 In the right pane, click Server agent dashboard. The following figure shows an example server agent dashboard. Displaying the Client agent dashboard The agent dashboard shows information about running jobs and the jobs that completed most recently on a selected department or a selected agent. To refresh the data in this dashboard, press function key F5. To display the agent dashboard 1 Click Manage > Agent. 2 Expand the tree view in the left pane until the department or agent you want displays. Click the plus sign (+) next to each entity to expand the tree.

254 254 Reports Central storage pool authority reports 3 Select a department or agent. 4 Click Agent Dashboard in the right pane. The following figure shows an example agent dashboard. Central storage pool authority reports In a large PureDisk environment, you can configure multiple storage pools. You can configure one of these storage pools to be the central storage pool. You can enable this capability at installation time or at a later date. From the central storage pool authority, you can generate and view licensing and capacity reports for all the storage pools in your environment. For more information, see the user authentication information in the PureDisk Getting Started Guide. For more information about central reporting and the central reporting dashboards, see the following: See Displaying the Central Reporting dashboard on page 254. See Updating the Central Reporting dashboard on page 259. See About central reporting on page 300. Displaying the Central Reporting dashboard The following procedure explains how to retrieve a dashboard report that contains licensing and capacity information.

255 Reports Central storage pool authority reports 255 To retrieve licensing and capacity information 1 Verify that you have the Central Report permission. Only users with Central Report permissions have rights to view and update the reports. For more information about permissions, see the PureDisk Client Installation Guide. 2 Click Settings > Central SPA. 3 In the left pane, click Storage Pool Management. 4 In the right pane, click Central SPA Dashboard. 5 Click one of the following tabs in the dashboard display: Enterprise License Report (default view). See Enterprise License Report tab on page 255. Storage Pools. See Storage Pools tab on page 257. Licenses / Features. See Licenses \ Features tab on page 257. Capacity Usage Report. See Capacity Usage Report tab on page 258. Enterprise License Report tab The Enterprise License Report tab displays a quick overview of your license status. Table 9-10 explains the columns on this tab.

256 256 Reports Central storage pool authority reports Table 9-10 Column heading Enterprise License Report tab content Information or data Storage Edition / Agents Lists each individual feature license and lists the PureDisk edition license that is installed on this storage pool. Certain PureDisk features require separate licenses. The report lists each edition or license in its own, separate row. There can be only one PureDisk edition. There can be more than one feature license; for example: Windows Application & Database Pack, Standard Agent, and so on. This dashboard report does not include information about the PureDisk Deduplication Option (PDDO). If PDDO is enabled in this storage pool, you can retrieve reporting data from the NetBackup media server. Licensed For a feature license row, this column lists the number of clients that can use this feature. For the PureDisk edition row, this column lists the amount of front end data, on the client, that you can protect with PureDisk backups. Used For a feature license row, this column lists the number of clients that currently use this feature. For the PureDisk edition row, this column displays the amount of front end, client storage that this storage pool currently protects. Alerts Displays alerts under the following conditions: When the used capacity is greater than the licensed capacity. When the number of features used is greater than the number of features licensed.

257 Reports Central storage pool authority reports 257 Storage Pools tab The Storage pools tab displays the connectivity status of all storage pools that are registered to the central storage pool. Table 9-11 explains the columns on this tab. Table 9-11 Column heading SPA Name SPA Version FQDN Storage Pools tab content Information or data The name of each registered storage pool. The PureDisk release level that is installed on each registered storage pool. The address of each registered storage pool. Connectivity status Active License keys An icon that represents the connectivity status between each registered storage pool and the central storage pool. The number of valid license keys that are installed on the registered storage pool. You can install the same license key on multiple storage pools, but this report lists each key only once. Licenses \ Features tab For each registered storage pool, PureDisk displays all installed licenses in the Licenses \ Features tab. PureDisk updates license keys with time restrictions before it displays the tab. Unlike the Storage Pools tab, the Licenses \ Features tab can display a license key more than once. Table 9-12 explains the columns on this tab. Table 9-12 Column heading License key Feature Expiry Licenses \ Features tab content Information or data The license key content. The feature that is enabled by that key row. The license key expiration date. If this field shows that a particular license is due to expire, contact your Symantec sales representative.

258 258 Reports Central storage pool authority reports Table 9-12 Column heading Capacity Locations Licenses \ Features tab content (continued) Information or data The capacity that is enabled by that license key. If this field shows that a particular license capacity is about to be exceeded, contact your Symantec sales representative. The computer upon which you installed the license key. To view a licenses and features report for a particular license type or all types Use the Filter on feature pull-down menu to select a license type. Your choices are as follows: All Premium Infrastructure Windows Application & Database Pack Standard Agent Capacity Usage Report tab This report shows total capacity statistics. The Last updated on column of this report shows the date of the last update for each storage pool.table 9-13 explains the columns on this tab. Table 9-13 Column heading SPA Name Last updated on Used capacity Standard Agents Capacity Usage Report tab content Information or data The name of each registered storage pool. The date and time when the report data was created. The amount of front end, client storage that this storage pool currently protects. This column does not describe the amount of storage occupied by backup data in the PureDisk storage pool. The number of backup and restore or storage pool agents deployed in this storage pool.

259 Reports Central storage pool authority reports 259 Table 9-13 Column heading Capacity Usage Report tab content (continued) Information or data Windows application and database pack The number of application program agents deployed in this storage pool. Updating the Central Reporting dashboard PureDisk updates the license data for these reports daily. If you click the update link in each report, PureDisk updates the data from all the storage pools that are configured under the central storage pool. For example, you might want to update license data after you delete license keys or add additional keys to increase your licensed capacity. The update can take considerable time. If PureDisk does not receive a response from a storage pool within the configured time period, PureDisk marks the storage pool as temporarily unavailable. If a storage pool is temporarily unavailable, PureDisk includes the last available information in the report. All reports show the date of the last update. To view the latest information Click update from any report.

260 260 Reports Central storage pool authority reports

261 Chapter 10 Log files and auditing This chapter includes the following topics: About the log file directory Audit trail reporting Setting debugging mode About the log file directory PureDisk writes log files to the following directory on each PureDisk node: /Storage/log For each seven-day interval, PureDisk retains up to 1000 lines of logging messages in the active log file in /Storage/log. Note that log files from PureDisk services are often greater than 5 MB in length, but PureDisk does not retain job log files that are greater than 5 MB in length. PureDisk uses the standard Linux log rotation mechanism to rotate the audit log every seven days. Log rotation ensures that the log files do not become too large. PureDisk moves old logging information into separate files and compresses the files to save space. PureDisk does not remove old log files. You can examine the old log files in /Storage/log. The old files are named /Storage/log/audit.log.1.bz2, /Storage/log/audit.log.2.bz2, and so on. The last 1000 lines of every log file are always accessible in the /Storage/log directory. The following describe log files: See Content router log files on page 262. See Metabase engine log file on page 265. See Workflow engine log file on page 268.

262 262 Log files and auditing About the log file directory See Server agent log files on page 270. See About international characters in log files on page 272. Content router log files All content routers log files are located in the /Storage/log/spoold/ directory. The following describe the content router log files: See The spoold.log file on page 262. See The storaged.log file on page 263. See Logging and debugging options on page 264. The spoold.log file PureDisk writes all incoming connections to the content router in the /Storage/log/spoold/spoold.log log file. Example 1. The following is an incoming multistream backup (pdbackup.exe) from a 32-bit Windows agent, version ( ) for data selection 7: January 17 16:10:11 INFO [ ]: Task Manager: started task 0 [thread ] for :1636 January 17 16:10:11 INFO [ ]: Remote is using libcr Version , Protocol Version 6.1 running on WIN32. Agent pdbackup.exe requesting access for DataSelection ID 7 Example 2. The following shows the metabase engine ( = MBE IP) requesting a POList (MBE-CLI application) from system data selection 1: January 17 16:10:16 INFO [ ]: Task Manager: started task 0 [thread ] for :51050 January 17 16:10:16 INFO [ ]: Remote is using libcr Version , Protocol Version 6.1 running on Linux-x86_64. Agent MBE-CLI requesting access for DataSelection ID 1 If you want an overview of all incoming single-stream backups (PutFiles), you can search the spoold.log file, as follows: PureDisk:/Storage/log/spoold # grep -B 1 PutFiles spoold.log

263 Log files and auditing About the log file directory 263 January 17 14:10:12 INFO [ ]: Task Manager: started task 0 [thread ] for :3738 January 17 14:10:12 INFO [ ]: Remote is using libcr Version , Protocol Version 6.1 running on WIN32. Agent PutFiles requesting access for DataSelection ID 1 -- January 17 15:10:10 INFO [ ]: Task Manager: started task 0 [thread ] for :4438 January 17 15:10:10 INFO [ ]: Remote is using libcr Version , Protocol Version 6.1 running on WIN32. Agent PutFiles requesting access for DataSelection ID 7 -- January 17 16:10:11 INFO [ ]: Task Manager: started task 0 [thread ] for :1638 January 17 16:10:11 INFO [ ]: Remote is using libcr Version , Protocol Version 6.1 running on WIN32. Agent PutFiles requesting access for DataSelection ID 4 -- January 17 17:10:13 INFO [ ]: Task Manager: started task 0 [thread ] for :2201 January 17 17:10:13 INFO [ ]: Remote is using libcr Version , Protocol Version 6.1 running on WIN32. Agent PutFiles requesting access for DataSelection ID 9 In the preceding grep(1) command, the -B 1 parameter specifies to show the line before the match, so the connecting client IP address is also displayed. The storaged.log file PureDisk records processing information related to the content router spooler queue, the content router database, and the /Storage/data directory in the /Storage/log/spoold/storaged.log log file. For each transaction log, PureDisk logs the number of actions per type. For example: August 25 14:58:45 INFO [ ]: Queue processing triggered by external request. August 25 14:58:45 INFO [ ]: Starting sort of tlog file range August 25 14:58:45 INFO [ ]: Finished sort of tlog file range in 0 seconds.

264 264 Log files and auditing About the log file directory August 25 14:58:45 INFO [ ]: Preparing to process transaction log /Storage/queue/sorted tlog August 25 14:58:45 INFO [ ]: Synchronization for transaction log /Storage/queue/sorted tlog started, transactions pending. August 25 14:58:49 INFO [ ]: Number of data store commits: 225 August 25 14:58:49 INFO [ ]: Time required to build index on objects2 table: August 25 14:58:49 INFO [ ]: Time required to drop objects table: August 25 14:58:49 INFO [ ]: Time required to rename objects2 table to objects: August 25 14:58:49 INFO [ ]: Transaction log Completed. Expect: (0.82MB) Commit: (0.00MB) Retry: 0 Log: /Storage/queue/sorted tlog SO: Add 0, Ref Add 14298, Ref Add Fail: 0, Ref Del 0 DO: Add 0, Ref Add 0, Ref Add Fail: 0, Ref Del 4 TASK: Add 2, End 2, End All 0, Del 0 DCID: SO 0, SO Fail 0, DO 0, DO Fail 0 MARKER: 0, Fail 0 August 25 14:58:49 INFO [ ]: Update last committed tlogid from 520 to 525 August 25 14:58:49 INFO [ ]: Start processing delayed operations of '/Storage/queue/sorted delayed'. August 25 14:58:49 INFO [ ]: Completed processing of delayed operations of '/Storage/queue/sorted delayed'. Logging and debugging options If you want to increase logging in all content router log files, modify the content router configuration file. For information about how to change configuration files, see the following: See About the configuration files on page 321.

265 Log files and auditing About the log file directory 265 To increase logging in all content router log files 1 In the PureDisk administrator Web UI, click Settings > Configuration > ConfigurationFileTemplates>PureDiskContentRouter>DefaultValueSet for PureDisk ContentRouter > Logging > Logging. 2 Change the All OS: value to full,thread. 3 Type the following command to restart the content router: # /etc/init.d/puredisk restart pdcr If you want to specify that the log files include more information, include the --trace parameter when you restart the content router. For example: # /etc/init.d/puredisk stop pdcr # /opt/pdcr/bin/spoold --trace /Storage/log/spoold/trace.log If you specified the --trace parameter, later you can specify the following to disable tracing: # /etc/init.d/puredisk restart pdcr Metabase engine log file The metabase engine log file is located in /Storage/log/mbe.log. Most of the information logged in the mbe.log file is related to the activity of importing information into the metabase engine database. Each metabase import is defined by a task ID, which consists of the data selection ID and the job step start time. For example, [Task [ ]] is an import for data selection 4, started on Sat Jan 12 22:55: , which is a converted UNIX time stamp. The following example mbe.log file lists imports: Sat Jan 12 22:51:33 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (DISPATCHER) Dispatcher has set a task to approved. Sat Jan 12 22:51:34 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (DOWNLOAD 0) Download: A job has arrived! Sat Jan 12 22:51:40 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (DOWNLOAD 0) Download: finished! Sat Jan 12 22:51:41 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (DISPATCHER) Dispatcher has set a task to approved. Sat Jan 12 22:51:42 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]]

266 266 Log files and auditing About the log file directory (SORT0) Starting sort for /Storage/tmp/pre57295.tmp Sat Jan 12 22:51:43 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (DISPATCHER) Dispatcher has set a task to approved. Sat Jan 12 22:51:44 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (SPLIT0) Starting to split Sat Jan 12 22:51:47 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (SPLIT0) Splitting file Sat Jan 12 22:51:48 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (SPLIT0) Generating dirfile Sat Jan 12 22:51:49 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (SPLIT0) Done converting Sat Jan 12 22:51:49 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (DISPATCHER) Dispatcher has set a task to approved. Sat Jan 12 22:51:50 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (IMPORT0) ImportThread has work to do. Sat Jan 12 22:51:50 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (IMPORT0) ImportThread going to import /Storage/tmp/bulkInsert57297 Sat Jan 12 22:51:50 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (IMPORT0) ImportThread going to import a raw POlist Sat Jan 12 22:51:51 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (IMPORT0) ImportThread going to import a raw POlist Sat Jan 12 22:51:51 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (IMPORT0) Import done Sat Jan 12 22:51:51 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (DISPATCHER) Dispatcher has set a task to approved. Sat Jan 12 22:51:52 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (EVAL0) Evaluating DataSelection 2. Sat Jan 12 22:51:53 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (EVAL0) No duplicate or minor PO's were detected. Sat Jan 12 22:51:53 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (EVAL0) DataSelection 2 succesfully evaluated. Sat Jan 12 22:51:55 CST 2008 <INFO> (DEPARTSERVLET) Task has completed:task [ ] Sat Jan 12 22:55:38 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (DISPATCHER) Dispatcher has set a task to approved. Sat Jan 12 22:55:38 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (DOWNLOAD 0) Download: A job has arrived! Sat Jan 12 22:55:39 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (DOWNLOAD 0) Download: finished! Sat Jan 12 22:55:40 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (DISPATCHER) Dispatcher has set a task to approved. Sat Jan 12 22:55:40 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (SORT1) Starting sort for /Storage/tmp/pre57303.tmp

267 Log files and auditing About the log file directory 267 Sat Jan 12 22:55:42 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (DISPATCHER) Dispatcher has set a task to approved. Sat Jan 12 22:55:42 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (SPLIT0) Starting to split Sat Jan 12 22:55:42 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (SPLIT0) Splitting file Sat Jan 12 22:55:42 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (SPLIT0) Generating dirfile Sat Jan 12 22:55:42 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (SPLIT0) Done converting Sat Jan 12 22:55:43 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (DISPATCHER) Dispatcher has set a task to approved. Sat Jan 12 22:55:43 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (IMPORT0) ImportThread has work to do. Sat Jan 12 22:55:43 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (IMPORT0) ImportThread going to import /Storage/tmp/bulkInsert57305 Sat Jan 12 22:55:43 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (IMPORT0) ImportThread going to import a raw POlist Sat Jan 12 22:55:43 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (IMPORT0) ImportThread going to import a raw POlist Sat Jan 12 22:55:43 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (IMPORT0) Import done Sat Jan 12 22:55:44 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (DISPATCHER) Dispatcher has set a task to approved. Sat Jan 12 22:55:44 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (EVAL0) Evaluating DataSelection 4. Sat Jan 12 22:55:44 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (EVAL0) No duplicate or minor PO's were detected. Sat Jan 12 22:55:44 CST 2008 <INFO> [Task [ ]] (EVAL0) DataSelection 4 succesfully evaluated. If your log file is large, you can search for the information you want. For example, type the following command to display all imports for data selection 7: PureDisk:/Storage/log # grep 'Task \[7-' mbe.log The metabase engine disk evaluator logs disk usage every 5 minutes. For example: Thu Jan 17 17:28:57 CST 2008 <INFO> (DISKEVALUATOR0) Evaluating left disk space Thu Jan 17 17:28:58 CST 2008 <INFO> (DISKEVALUATOR0) Diskspace used on partition with the metabase database is: 28.0%. Thu Jan 17 17:29:00 CST 2008 <INFO> (DISKEVALUATOR0) Diskspace used on partition with metabase tmp folder is: 28.0%.

268 268 Log files and auditing About the log file directory Workflow engine log file PureDisk writes all workflow engine job, job step, and watchdog actions to file /Storage/log/pdwfe.log. The following describe the workflow engine log file: See The pdwfe.log file on page 268. See Logging and debugging options on page 270. The pdwfe.log file The following is an example log file: Thu Jan :07: INFO ( ): Agent 'PureDisk' (id: ): no jobstep found Thu Jan :08: INFO ( ): Agent 'PureDisk' (id: ): no jobstep found Thu Jan :09: INFO ( ): Agent 'PureDisk' (id: ): no jobstep found Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Run Policy 'scheduled' (id :106) Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Created 'Files and Folders Backup' for Agent 'ros2pc00' (id: 2) Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Return Jobstep 'PrepareBackup.php' (id: 155) to Agent 'ros2pc00' (id: 2) Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update status of jobstep 155 from RUNNING to SUCCESS Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Return Jobstep 'ScanFilesystem.php' (id: 156) to Agent 'ros2pc00' (id: 2) Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Agent 'ros2pc00' (id: 2): no jobstep found Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update status of jobstep 156 from RUNNING to SUCCESS Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Return Jobstep 'PutFiles.php' (id: 157) to Agent 'ros2pc00' (id: 2) Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Agent 'ros2pc00' (id: 2): no jobstep found The pdwfe.log file contains information about the following common workflow engine actions: About the watchdog: Thu Jan :00: INFO Thu Jan :00: INFO ( ): Running watch dog. ( ): Watchdog Run successful.

269 Log files and auditing About the log file directory 269 About agents when they request the next job step (nextjobstep web service): Thu Jan :05: INFO ( ): Agent 'PureDisk' (id: ): no jobstep found About job steps distributed over agents: Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Return Jobstep 'PrepareBackup.php' (id: 155) to Agent 'ros2pc00' (id: 2) Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update status of jobstep 155 from RUNNING to SUCCESS You can retrieve log information related to a single job. For example, to obtain workflow engine log information related to job ID 24, type the following command: PureDisk:/Storage/log # grep 'Job 24' pdwfe.log Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Created 'Files and Folders Backup' for Agent 'ros2pc00' (id: 2) Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Return Jobstep 'PrepareBackup.php' (id: 155) to Agent 'ros2pc00' (id: 2) Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update status of jobstep 155 from RUNNING to SUCCESS Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Return Jobstep 'ScanFilesystem.php' (id: 156) to Agent 'ros2pc00' (id: 2) Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update status of jobstep 156 from RUNNING to SUCCESS Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Return Jobstep 'PutFiles.php' (id: 157) to Agent 'ros2pc00' (id: 2) Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update Variables Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update Variables Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update Variables Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update Variables Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update Variables Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update Variables Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update status of jobstep 157 from RUNNING to SUCCESS_WITH_ERRORS

270 270 Log files and auditing About the log file directory Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Return Jobstep 'MBImportAction.php' (id: 158) to Agent 'PureDisk' (id: ) Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update Variables Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update Variables Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update status of jobstep 158 from RUNNING to SUCCESS Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Return Jobstep 'ProcessJobStatistics.php' (id: 159) to Agent 'PureDisk' (id: ) Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update Variables Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update status of jobstep 159 from RUNNING to SUCCESS Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Return Jobstep 'FinishBackup.php' (id: 160) to Agent 'ros2pc00' (id: 2) Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Update status of jobstep 160 from RUNNING to SUCCESS Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Process Workflow Engine Job Step 'markexit' (id :161) Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Job 24: Workflow Engine: Step 161 returns SUCCESS Logging and debugging options You can increase the amount of information that PureDisk writes to /Storage/log/pdwfe.log. To increase the amount of logging information that PureDisk writes, log into the storage pool authority and type the following commands: # /etc/init.d/puredisk stop pdworkflowd # /opt/pdwfe/bin/pdwfe --trace Server agent log files PureDisk logs all server agent actions to /Storage/log/Agent.log. PureDisk logs all job step logs to /Storage/tmp/workflow.XXXX, where XXXX is the job step ID. The following describe the server agent log files: See The Agent.log file on page 271. See The job step log on page 271. See Logging and debugging options on page 272.

271 Log files and auditing About the log file directory 271 The Agent.log file The following is an example of an Agent.log file: Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Incoming request: kick Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Jobstep: ProcessJobStatistics.php Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Logfile path: '/Storage/tmp/workflow.172' Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Updating status for job step #172 Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Upload logfile /Storage/tmp/workflow.172 (1382 bytes) using SPA webservice. Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Jobstep 172 successfully set to status 2 Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Incoming request: kick Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Jobstep: MBImportAction.php Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Logfile path: '/Storage/tmp/workflow.178' Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Updating status for job step #178 Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Upload logfile /Storage/tmp/workflow.178 (1445 bytes) using SPA webservice. Thu Jan :10: INFO ( ): Jobstep 178 successfully set to status 2 In this example, there are two job steps processes: ProcessJobStatistics and MBImportAction. All log lines that relate to these job steps have the same thread ID: for ProcessJobStatistics and for MBImportAction. The job step log Each job step that runs creates a job step log on the local agent. This log file is loaded in the administrator Web UI for the job details. The following procedure explains how to find information about a job step.

272 272 Log files and auditing About the log file directory To find a job step ID for a running job 1 Click Monitor > Jobs. 2 In the right pane, click the number in the Job Id column that corresponds to the job that contains the job step that you want to examine. 3 In the pop-up that appears, click the Details tab. 4 On the Details tab, click on the row that describes the job step you want to examine. 5 On the left pane of the Details tab, note the jobid information. If necessary, use the pull-down menu to select Normal (the default), Verbose, Very Verbose, or Show All to display differing amounts of information. Logging and debugging options By default, the PureDisk agent removes all job scripts and job logs when a job step finishes. If you want to retain these files on a particular client system, edit the agent.cfg file on that particular client. The location of this file differs depending on your platform. For example, on a Windows client, agent.cfg is located in install_dir\program Files\Symantec\NetBackup PureDisk Agent\etc\agent.cfg. When you edit this file, go into the debug section, and set the debug parameter to 1. About international characters in log files The PureDisk log files contain up to 1000 international characters under the following conditions: If you use international characters to specify names, descriptions, and other labels in the storage pool If the PureDisk agent is installed on a localized client PureDisk displays these characters correctly when you view log files, such as job logs, through the Web UI. You can view the server logs stored in /Storage/log on a PureDisk node. However, you might need to make some configuration changes depending on where and how you want to view these log files. These configuration changes are as follows: If you log on to the PureDisk node with a secure shell connection (SSH) on Linux or UNIX, make sure you use a UTF-8 locale. For example, use en_us.utf-8.

273 Log files and auditing Audit trail reporting 273 Audit trail reporting You can log on to the PureDisk node with a Windows terminal client such as Putty. Ensure that the terminal client uses the UTF-8 character set and a font that contains the international characters that you need to display. If you log on to the PureDisk node directly through the console, PureDisk does not display international characters properly. Use one of the previous methods to view log files with international characters. The audit trail report shows a list of users and storage pool activities. You must be logged in as root to retrieve audit log information. Figure 10-1 Example audit trail report

Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Administrator's Guide

Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Administrator's Guide Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Administrator's Guide Windows, Linux, and UNIX Release 6.6.5 Revision 1 The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance

More information

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions HA and Disaster Recovery Solutions Guide for Microsoft SharePoint Server

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions HA and Disaster Recovery Solutions Guide for Microsoft SharePoint Server Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions HA and Disaster Recovery Solutions Guide for Microsoft SharePoint Server Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008 5.1 Service Pack 1 Veritas Storage

More information

Symantec Enterprise Vault Technical Note

Symantec Enterprise Vault Technical Note Symantec Enterprise Vault Technical Note FSA Reporting deployment guidelines 8.0 Symantec Information Foundation Symantec Enterprise Vault: FSA Reporting deployment guidelines The software described in

More information

Symantec Backup Exec System Recovery Granular Restore Option User's Guide

Symantec Backup Exec System Recovery Granular Restore Option User's Guide Symantec Backup Exec System Recovery Granular Restore Option User's Guide Symantec Backup Exec System Recovery Granular Restore Option User's Guide The software described in this book is furnished under

More information

Symantec Endpoint Protection Integration Component User's Guide. Version 7.0

Symantec Endpoint Protection Integration Component User's Guide. Version 7.0 Symantec Endpoint Protection Integration Component User's Guide Version 7.0 The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms

More information

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Modules for Microsoft SQL Server Databases Release Notes. Release 2.1 for Symantec ESM 6.0, 6.1, and 6.5.

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Modules for Microsoft SQL Server Databases Release Notes. Release 2.1 for Symantec ESM 6.0, 6.1, and 6.5. Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Modules for Microsoft SQL Server Databases Release Notes Release 2.1 for Symantec ESM 6.0, 6.1, and 6.5.x For Windows 2000, Windows Server 2003, and Windows XP SQL

More information

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Baseline Policy Manual for CIS Benchmark. For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Baseline Policy Manual for CIS Benchmark. For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Baseline Policy Manual for CIS Benchmark For Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 Symantec ESM Baseline Policy Manual for CIS Benchmark for Red Hat Enterprise Linux 5 The software

More information

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions HA and Disaster Recovery Solutions Guide for Enterprise Vault

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions HA and Disaster Recovery Solutions Guide for Enterprise Vault Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions HA and Disaster Recovery Solutions Guide for Enterprise Vault Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 5.1 Service Pack 1 Veritas Storage Foundation

More information

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Getting Started Guide

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Getting Started Guide Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Getting Started Guide Windows Server 2008 (x64), Windows Server 2008 R2 (x64) 6.0 21213723 (October 2011) Veritas Storage Foundation and High

More information

Symantec Enterprise Vault Technical Note

Symantec Enterprise Vault Technical Note Symantec Enterprise Vault Technical Note Troubleshooting OWA Extensions 8.0 Symantec Information Foundation Symantec Enterprise Vault: Troubleshooting OWA Extensions The software described in this book

More information

Symantec NetBackup Vault Operator's Guide

Symantec NetBackup Vault Operator's Guide Symantec NetBackup Vault Operator's Guide UNIX, Windows, and Linux Release 7.6 Symantec NetBackup Vault Operator's Guide The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may

More information

Symantec NetBackup for Lotus Notes Administrator's Guide. Release 7.6

Symantec NetBackup for Lotus Notes Administrator's Guide. Release 7.6 Symantec NetBackup for Lotus Notes Administrator's Guide Release 7.6 The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of the

More information

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Baseline Policy Manual for CIS Benchmark. AIX 5.3 and 6.1

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Baseline Policy Manual for CIS Benchmark. AIX 5.3 and 6.1 Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Baseline Policy Manual for CIS Benchmark AIX 5.3 and 6.1 Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Baseline Policy Manual for CIS Benchmark for AIX 5.3 and 6.1 The software

More information

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Getting Started Guide

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Getting Started Guide Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Getting Started Guide Windows Server 2008 (x64), Windows Server 2008 R2 (x64) 6.0.1 21271162 (October 2012) Veritas Storage Foundation and High

More information

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Baseline Policy Manual for Security Essentials. Solaris 10

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Baseline Policy Manual for Security Essentials. Solaris 10 Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Baseline Policy Manual for Security Essentials Solaris 10 Symantec ESM Baseline Policy Manual for Security Essentials for Solaris 10 The software described in this

More information

Veritas CommandCentral Enterprise Reporter Release Notes

Veritas CommandCentral Enterprise Reporter Release Notes Veritas CommandCentral Enterprise Reporter Release Notes for Microsoft Windows and Solaris 5.2 RU3 February 2012 CommandCentral Enterprise Reporter Release Notes The software described in this book is

More information

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager JRE Vulnerability Fix Update Guide

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager JRE Vulnerability Fix Update Guide Symantec Enterprise Security Manager JRE Vulnerability Fix Update Guide 2 Symantec Enterprise Security Manager JRE Vulnerability Fix Update Guide The software described in this book is furnished under

More information

Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide

Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide Symantec NetBackup PureDisk Storage Pool Installation Guide Windows, Linux, and UNIX Release 665 Revision 1 The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only

More information

Symantec Workflow Solution 7.1 MP1 Installation and Configuration Guide

Symantec Workflow Solution 7.1 MP1 Installation and Configuration Guide Symantec Workflow Solution 7.1 MP1 Installation and Configuration Guide Symantec Workflow Installation and Configuration Guide The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement

More information

Symantec System Recovery 2013 R2 Management Solution Administrator's Guide

Symantec System Recovery 2013 R2 Management Solution Administrator's Guide Symantec System Recovery 2013 R2 Management Solution Administrator's Guide Symantec System Recovery 2013 R2 Management Solution Administrator's Guide The software described in this book is furnished under

More information

IM: Symantec Security Information Manager Patch 4 Resolved Issues

IM: Symantec Security Information Manager Patch 4 Resolved Issues IM: Symantec Security Information Manager 4.7.2 Patch 4 Resolved Symantec Security Information Manager 4.7.2 Patch 4 Resolved The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement

More information

Veritas Cluster Server Application Note: High Availability for BlackBerry Enterprise Server

Veritas Cluster Server Application Note: High Availability for BlackBerry Enterprise Server Veritas Cluster Server Application Note: High Availability for BlackBerry Enterprise Server Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008 5.1 Service Pack 2 Veritas Cluster Server Application Note: High Availability

More information

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Modules for Oracle Release Notes

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Modules for Oracle Release Notes Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Modules for Oracle Release Notes Release 5.0 for Symantec ESM 9.0 and 10.0 For Red Hat Enterprise Linux, HP-UX, AIX, Solaris, and Windows Symantec Enterprise Security

More information

Symantec NetBackup Deduplication Guide. Release 7.0

Symantec NetBackup Deduplication Guide. Release 7.0 Symantec NetBackup Deduplication Guide Release 7.0 20654102 Symantec NetBackup Deduplication Guide The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance

More information

Symantec NetBackup Appliance Fibre Channel Guide

Symantec NetBackup Appliance Fibre Channel Guide Symantec NetBackup Appliance Fibre Channel Guide Release 2.6.1.2 NetBackup 52xx and 5330 Symantec NetBackup Appliance Fibre Channel Guide Documentation version: 2.6.1.2 Legal Notice Copyright 2015 Symantec

More information

Configuring Symantec. device

Configuring Symantec. device Configuring Symantec AntiVirus for Hitachi File OS device Configuring Symantec AntiVirus for Hitachi File OS device The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be

More information

Symantec Encryption Management Server and Symantec Data Loss Prevention. Integration Guide

Symantec Encryption Management Server and Symantec Data Loss Prevention. Integration Guide Symantec Encryption Management Server and Symantec Data Loss Prevention Integration Guide The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance

More information

Configuring Symantec Protection Engine for Network Attached Storage for Hitachi Unified and NAS Platforms

Configuring Symantec Protection Engine for Network Attached Storage for Hitachi Unified and NAS Platforms Configuring Symantec Protection Engine for Network Attached Storage 7.0.1 for Hitachi Unified and NAS Platforms Configuring Symantec Protection Engine for Network Attached Storage 7.0.1 for Hitachi Unified

More information

Security Content Update Release Notes for CCS 12.x

Security Content Update Release Notes for CCS 12.x Security Content Update 2018-1 Release Notes for CCS 12.x SCU 2018-1 Release Notes for CCS 12.0 Documentation version: 1.0 Legal Notice Copyright 2018 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved. Symantec,

More information

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Application Note: Support for HP-UX Integrity Virtual Machines

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Application Note: Support for HP-UX Integrity Virtual Machines Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Application Note: Support for HP-UX Integrity Virtual Machines HP-UX 11i v3 5.0.1 Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Application

More information

Veritas Desktop and Laptop Option 9.2. Disaster Recovery Scenarios

Veritas Desktop and Laptop Option 9.2. Disaster Recovery Scenarios Veritas Desktop and Laptop Option 9.2 Disaster Recovery Scenarios 2 Veritas Desktop and Laptop Option The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only

More information

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager IBM DB2 Modules User Guide for Windows and UNIX. Version 4.2

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager IBM DB2 Modules User Guide for Windows and UNIX. Version 4.2 Symantec Enterprise Security Manager IBM DB2 Modules User Guide for Windows and UNIX Version 4.2 Symantec Enterprise Security Manager IBM DB2 Modules User Guide The software described in this book is furnished

More information

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager IBM DB2 Modules User Guide for Windows and UNIX. Version 4.6

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager IBM DB2 Modules User Guide for Windows and UNIX. Version 4.6 Symantec Enterprise Security Manager IBM DB2 Modules User Guide for Windows and UNIX Version 4.6 Symantec Enterprise Security Manager IBM DB2 Modules User Guide The software described in this book is furnished

More information

Symantec Security Information Manager FIPS Operational Mode Guide

Symantec Security Information Manager FIPS Operational Mode Guide Symantec Security Information Manager 4.7.3 FIPS 140-2 Operational Mode Guide Symantec Security Information Manager 4.7.3 FIPS 140-2 Operational Mode Guide The software described in this book is furnished

More information

Symantec Enterprise Vault

Symantec Enterprise Vault Symantec Enterprise Vault Deployment Scanner 10.0 Symantec Enterprise Vault: Deployment Scanner The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance

More information

NetBackup Copilot for Oracle Configuration Guide. Release 2.7.1

NetBackup Copilot for Oracle Configuration Guide. Release 2.7.1 NetBackup Copilot for Oracle Configuration Guide Release 2.7.1 NetBackup Copilot for Oracle Configuration Guide Documentation version: 2.7.1 Legal Notice Copyright 2015 Symantec Corporation. All rights

More information

Altiris Software Management Solution 7.1 from Symantec User Guide

Altiris Software Management Solution 7.1 from Symantec User Guide Altiris Software Management Solution 7.1 from Symantec User Guide Altiris Software Management Solution 7.1 from Symantec User Guide The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement

More information

Configuring Symantec AntiVirus for BlueArc Storage System

Configuring Symantec AntiVirus for BlueArc Storage System Configuring Symantec AntiVirus for BlueArc Storage System Configuring Symantec AntiVirus for BlueArc Storage System The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be

More information

Symantec ApplicationHA Release Notes

Symantec ApplicationHA Release Notes Symantec ApplicationHA Release Notes Linux on KVM 6.0 December 2011 Symantec ApplicationHA Release Notes The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only

More information

Veritas Cluster Server Library Management Pack Guide for Microsoft System Center Operations Manager 2007

Veritas Cluster Server Library Management Pack Guide for Microsoft System Center Operations Manager 2007 Veritas Cluster Server Library Management Pack Guide for Microsoft System Center Operations Manager 2007 Windows VCS Library Management Pack Veritas Cluster Server Library Management Pack Guide for Microsoft

More information

Symantec NetBackup for Enterprise Vault Agent Administrator's Guide

Symantec NetBackup for Enterprise Vault Agent Administrator's Guide Symantec NetBackup for Enterprise Vault Agent Administrator's Guide for Windows Release 7.1 Symantec NetBackup for Enterprise Vault Agent Administrator's Guide The software described in this book is furnished

More information

PGP Viewer for ios. Administrator s Guide 1.0

PGP Viewer for ios. Administrator s Guide 1.0 PGP Viewer for ios Administrator s Guide 1.0 The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Version 1.0.2.

More information

Veritas Operations Manager Storage Insight Add-on for Deep Array Discovery and Mapping 4.0 User's Guide

Veritas Operations Manager Storage Insight Add-on for Deep Array Discovery and Mapping 4.0 User's Guide Veritas Operations Manager Storage Insight Add-on for Deep Array Discovery and Mapping 4.0 User's Guide Veritas Operations Manager Storage Insight Add-on for Deep Array Discovery and Mapping The software

More information

Symantec ApplicationHA Agent for Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) Configuration Guide

Symantec ApplicationHA Agent for Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) Configuration Guide Symantec ApplicationHA Agent for Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) Configuration Guide Windows Server 2003, Windows Server 2008 and 2008 R2 5.1 Service Pack 2 September 2011 Symantec ApplicationHA

More information

Veritas NetBackup Copilot for Oracle Configuration Guide. Release 2.7.2

Veritas NetBackup Copilot for Oracle Configuration Guide. Release 2.7.2 Veritas NetBackup Copilot for Oracle Configuration Guide Release 2.7.2 Veritas NetBackup Copilot for Oracle Configuration Guide Documentation version: 2.7.2 Legal Notice Copyright 2016 Veritas Technologies

More information

Veritas Backup Exec Migration Assistant

Veritas Backup Exec Migration Assistant Veritas Backup Exec Migration Assistant Legal Notice Copyright 2017 Veritas Technologies LLC. All rights reserved. Veritas and the Veritas Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Veritas Technologies

More information

Veritas System Recovery 18 Linux Edition: Quick Installation Guide

Veritas System Recovery 18 Linux Edition: Quick Installation Guide Veritas System Recovery 18 Linux Edition: Quick Installation Guide Documentation version: 18 Legal Notice Copyright 2018 Veritas Technologies LLC. All rights reserved. Veritas and the Veritas Logo are

More information

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Modules for IBM DB2 Databases (Windows) User s Guide 3.0. Release for Symantec ESM 6.5.x and 9.

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Modules for IBM DB2 Databases (Windows) User s Guide 3.0. Release for Symantec ESM 6.5.x and 9. Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Modules for IBM DB2 Databases (Windows) User s Guide 3.0 Release for Symantec ESM 6.5.x and 9.0 for Windows Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Modules for IBM DB2

More information

Symantec NetBackup OpsCenter Reporting Guide. Release 7.7

Symantec NetBackup OpsCenter Reporting Guide. Release 7.7 Symantec NetBackup OpsCenter Reporting Guide Release 7.7 Symantec NetBackup OpsCenter Reporting Guide The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in

More information

PGP Viewer for ios. User s Guide 1.0

PGP Viewer for ios. User s Guide 1.0 PGP Viewer for ios User s Guide 1.0 The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Version 1.0.2. Last updated:

More information

Altiris IT Analytics Solution 7.1 from Symantec User Guide

Altiris IT Analytics Solution 7.1 from Symantec User Guide Altiris IT Analytics Solution 7.1 from Symantec User Guide Altiris IT Analytics Solution 7.1 from Symantec User Guide The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may

More information

Veritas Dynamic Multi-Pathing readme

Veritas Dynamic Multi-Pathing readme Veritas Dynamic Multi-Pathing readme Linux DMP 5.1 Rolling Patch 1 Patch 0 Veritas Dynamic Multi-Pathing Readme The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used

More information

Veritas NetBackup for SQLite Administrator's Guide

Veritas NetBackup for SQLite Administrator's Guide Veritas NetBackup for SQLite Administrator's Guide Windows and Linux Release 8.1.1 Documentation version: 8.1.1 Legal Notice Copyright 2018 Veritas Technologies LLC. All rights reserved. Veritas and the

More information

Altiris Client Management Suite 7.1 from Symantec User Guide

Altiris Client Management Suite 7.1 from Symantec User Guide Altiris Client Management Suite 7.1 from Symantec User Guide Altiris Client Management Suite 7.1 from Symantec User Guide The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and

More information

Symantec Enterprise Vault Technical Note

Symantec Enterprise Vault Technical Note Symantec Enterprise Vault Technical Note Migrating Enterprise Vault to 64-bit hardware 9.0 Symantec Enterprise Vault: Migrating Enterprise Vault to 64-bit hardware The software described in this book is

More information

Symantec Network Access Control Linux Agent User Guide

Symantec Network Access Control Linux Agent User Guide Symantec Network Access Control 5.1.7 Linux Agent User Guide Symantec Network Access Control 5.1.7 Linux Agent User Guide The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and

More information

Symantec ApplicationHA Agent for Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and 2008 R2 Configuration Guide

Symantec ApplicationHA Agent for Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and 2008 R2 Configuration Guide Symantec ApplicationHA Agent for Microsoft SQL Server 2008 and 2008 R2 Configuration Guide Windows Server 2003 (x64), Windows Server 2008 and 2008 R2 (x64) 5.1 Service Pack 2 06/13/2011 Symantec ApplicationHA

More information

Symantec PGP Viewer for ios

Symantec PGP Viewer for ios Symantec PGP Viewer for ios User's Guide 1.0 The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Version 1.0.0.

More information

Veritas Cluster Server Database Agent for Microsoft SQL Configuration Guide

Veritas Cluster Server Database Agent for Microsoft SQL Configuration Guide Veritas Cluster Server Database Agent for Microsoft SQL Configuration Guide Windows Server 2003 Windows Server 2008 5.1 Service Pack 2 Veritas Cluster Server Database Agent for Microsoft SQL Configuration

More information

Veritas System Recovery 18 Management Solution Administrator's Guide

Veritas System Recovery 18 Management Solution Administrator's Guide Veritas System Recovery 18 Management Solution Administrator's Guide Documentation version: 18 Legal Notice Copyright 2018 Veritas Technologies LLC. All rights reserved. Veritas and the Veritas Logo are

More information

Symantec NetBackup for Enterprise Vault Agent Administrator's Guide

Symantec NetBackup for Enterprise Vault Agent Administrator's Guide Symantec NetBackup for Enterprise Vault Agent Administrator's Guide for Windows Release 7.7 Symantec NetBackup for Enterprise Vault Agent Administrator's Guide Documentation version: 7.7 Legal Notice Copyright

More information

Veritas SaaS Backup for Office 365

Veritas SaaS Backup for Office 365 Veritas SaaS Backup for Office 365 Documentation version: 1.0 Legal Notice Copyright 2018 Veritas Technologies LLC. All rights reserved. Veritas and the Veritas Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks

More information

Symantec NetBackup Deduplication Appliance Software Getting Started Guide

Symantec NetBackup Deduplication Appliance Software Getting Started Guide Symantec NetBackup Deduplication Appliance Software Getting Started Guide Software Release 1.3.0.1 Documentation Version 1 NetBackup 5020 NetBackup 5000 The software described in this book is furnished

More information

Veritas SaaS Backup for Salesforce

Veritas SaaS Backup for Salesforce Veritas SaaS Backup for Salesforce Documentation version: 2.0 Legal Notice Copyright 2018 Veritas Technologies LLC. All rights reserved. Veritas and the Veritas Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks

More information

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Application Note: Support for HP-UX Integrity Virtual Machines

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Application Note: Support for HP-UX Integrity Virtual Machines Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Application Note: Support for HP-UX Integrity Virtual Machines HP-UX 11i v3 5.0.1 Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Application

More information

Symantec ServiceDesk 7.1 SP1 Implementation Guide

Symantec ServiceDesk 7.1 SP1 Implementation Guide Symantec ServiceDesk 7.1 SP1 Implementation Guide Symantec ServiceDesk 7.1 SP1 Implementation Guide The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance

More information

Symantec Endpoint Encryption Full Disk Maintenance Pack Release Notes

Symantec Endpoint Encryption Full Disk Maintenance Pack Release Notes Symantec Endpoint Encryption Full Disk Maintenance Pack Release Notes Thank you for using this Symantec Corporation product. These Release Notes contain important information regarding this release of

More information

Veritas System Recovery 16 Management Solution Administrator's Guide

Veritas System Recovery 16 Management Solution Administrator's Guide Veritas System Recovery 16 Management Solution Administrator's Guide Documentation version: 2017 Legal Notice Copyright 2017 Veritas Technologies LLC. All rights reserved. Veritas and the Veritas Logo

More information

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Agent, Manager, Console Update for Windows Server 2008

Symantec Enterprise Security Manager Agent, Manager, Console Update for Windows Server 2008 Symantec Enterprise Security Manager 6.5.3 Agent, Manager, Console Update for Windows Server 2008 2 Symantec Enterprise Security Manager 6.5.3 Agent, Manager, Console Update for Windows Server 2008 Symantec

More information

Veritas Desktop and Laptop Option 9.2. High Availability (HA) with DLO

Veritas Desktop and Laptop Option 9.2. High Availability (HA) with DLO Veritas Desktop and Laptop Option 9.2 High Availability (HA) with DLO 2 Veritas Desktop and Laptop Option The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may be used

More information

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Microsoft Clustering Solutions Guide for Microsoft Exchange 2007

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Microsoft Clustering Solutions Guide for Microsoft Exchange 2007 Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Microsoft Clustering Solutions Guide for Microsoft Exchange 2007 Windows Server 2008 (x64), Windows Server 2008 R2 (x64) 6.0 October 2011 Veritas

More information

PGP(TM) Universal Server Version 3.2 Maintenance Pack Release Notes

PGP(TM) Universal Server Version 3.2 Maintenance Pack Release Notes PGP(TM) Universal Server Version 3.2 Maintenance Pack Release Notes Thank you for using this Symantec Corporation product. These Release Notes contain important information regarding this release of PGP

More information

Symantec Encryption Desktop Version 10.2 for Mac OS X Release Notes. About Symantec Encryption Desktop

Symantec Encryption Desktop Version 10.2 for Mac OS X Release Notes. About Symantec Encryption Desktop Symantec Encryption Desktop Version 10.2 for Mac OS X Release Notes Thank you for using this Symantec Corporation product. These Release Notes contain important information regarding this release of Encryption

More information

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Getting Started Guide - Linux

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Getting Started Guide - Linux Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions 6.0.4 Getting Started Guide - Linux September 2013 Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Getting Started Guide The software

More information

Veritas Storage Foundation Add-on for Storage Provisioning User's Guide. 4.0 Release Update 1

Veritas Storage Foundation Add-on for Storage Provisioning User's Guide. 4.0 Release Update 1 Veritas Storage Foundation Add-on for Storage Provisioning User's Guide 4.0 Release Update 1 Veritas Storage Foundation Add-on for Storage Provisioning The software described in this book is furnished

More information

Veritas NetBackup for Lotus Notes Administrator's Guide

Veritas NetBackup for Lotus Notes Administrator's Guide Veritas NetBackup for Lotus Notes Administrator's Guide for UNIX, Windows, and Linux Release 8.0 Veritas NetBackup for Lotus Notes Administrator's Guide Document version: 8.0 Legal Notice Copyright 2016

More information

Client Guide for Symantec Endpoint Protection Small Business Edition

Client Guide for Symantec Endpoint Protection Small Business Edition Client Guide for Symantec Endpoint Protection Small Business Edition The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of the

More information

Wise Mobile Device Package Editor Reference

Wise Mobile Device Package Editor Reference Wise Mobile Device Package Editor Reference Mobile Device Package Editor The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance with the terms of

More information

Veritas Volume Replicator Web GUI Administrator's Guide

Veritas Volume Replicator Web GUI Administrator's Guide Veritas Volume Replicator Web GUI Administrator's Guide Solaris 5.0 Maintenance Pack 3 Veritas Volume Replicator Web GUI Administrator's Guide The software described in this book is furnished under a license

More information

Symantec NetBackup for Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator s Guide

Symantec NetBackup for Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator s Guide Symantec NetBackup for Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator s Guide for Windows Release 7.6 Symantec NetBackup for Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator's Guide The software described in this book

More information

Security Content Update Release Notes. Versions: CCS 11.1 and CCS 11.5

Security Content Update Release Notes. Versions: CCS 11.1 and CCS 11.5 Security Content Update 2016-1 Release Notes Versions: CCS 11.1 and CCS 11.5 SCU 2016-1 Release Notes for CCS 11.1 and CCS 11.5 Legal Notice Copyright 2016 Symantec Corporation. All rights reserved. Symantec,

More information

Altiris PC Transplant 6.8 SP4 from Symantec User Guide

Altiris PC Transplant 6.8 SP4 from Symantec User Guide Altiris PC Transplant 6.8 SP4 from Symantec User Guide Altiris PC Transplant 6.8 SP4 from Symantec User Guide The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used

More information

Symantec Control Compliance Suite Express Security Content Update for Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 (CIS Benchmark 2.1.

Symantec Control Compliance Suite Express Security Content Update for Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 (CIS Benchmark 2.1. Symantec Control Compliance Suite Express Security Content Update for Microsoft Windows Server 2008 R2 (CIS Benchmark 2.1.0) Release Notes Express Security Content Update for Microsoft Windows Server 2008

More information

Symantec pcanywhere 12.5 SP3 Administrator Guide

Symantec pcanywhere 12.5 SP3 Administrator Guide Symantec pcanywhere 12.5 SP3 Administrator Guide Symantec pcanywhere 12.5 SP3 Administrator Guide The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance

More information

Veritas Desktop and Laptop Option 9.3 README

Veritas Desktop and Laptop Option 9.3 README Veritas Desktop and Laptop Option 9.3 README 2 Veritas Desktop and Laptop Option: README The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance

More information

Veritas Storage Foundation for Oracle Graphical User Interface Guide. 5.0 Maintenance Pack 3

Veritas Storage Foundation for Oracle Graphical User Interface Guide. 5.0 Maintenance Pack 3 Veritas Storage Foundation for Oracle Graphical User Interface Guide 5.0 Maintenance Pack 3 Veritas Storage Foundation for Oracle Graphical User Interface Guide The software described in this book is furnished

More information

Symantec Corporation NetBackup for Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator s Guide

Symantec Corporation NetBackup for Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator s Guide Symantec Corporation NetBackup for Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator s Guide for Windows Release 7.1 Symantec Corporation NetBackup for Microsoft Exchange Server Administrator s Guide The software

More information

Veritas NetBackup for MySQL Administrator's Guide

Veritas NetBackup for MySQL Administrator's Guide Veritas NetBackup for MySQL Administrator's Guide Windows and Linux Release 8.1 Veritas NetBackup for MySQL Agent Administrator's Guide Documentation version: 8.1 Legal Notice Copyright 2017 Veritas Technologies

More information

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Quick Recovery Solutions Guide for Microsoft Exchange 2010

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Quick Recovery Solutions Guide for Microsoft Exchange 2010 Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Quick Recovery Solutions Guide for Microsoft Exchange 2010 Windows Server 2008 5.1 Service Pack 1 Application Pack 1 Veritas Storage Foundation

More information

Veritas NetBackup for Microsoft SQL Server Administrator's Guide

Veritas NetBackup for Microsoft SQL Server Administrator's Guide Veritas NetBackup for Microsoft SQL Server Administrator's Guide for Windows Release 8.1.1 Veritas NetBackup for Microsoft SQL Server Administrator's Guide Last updated: 2018-04-10 Document version:netbackup

More information

Veritas NetBackup for MySQL Administrator's Guide

Veritas NetBackup for MySQL Administrator's Guide Veritas NetBackup for MySQL Administrator's Guide Windows and Linux Release 8.1.1 Documentation version: 8.1.1 Legal Notice Copyright 2018 Veritas Technologies LLC. All rights reserved. Veritas and the

More information

Symantec Data Loss Prevention System Maintenance Guide. Version 14.0

Symantec Data Loss Prevention System Maintenance Guide. Version 14.0 Symantec Data Loss Prevention System Maintenance Guide Version 14.0 Symantec Data Loss Prevention System Maintenance Guide Documentation version: 14.0b Legal Notice Copyright 2015 Symantec Corporation.

More information

Symantec Disaster Recovery Advisor Release Notes

Symantec Disaster Recovery Advisor Release Notes Symantec Disaster Recovery Advisor Release Notes AIX, ESX, HP-UX, Linux, Solaris, Windows Server 6.2 2 Symantec Disaster Recovery Advisor Release Notes The software described in this book is furnished

More information

PGP Desktop Version 10.2 for Windows Maintenance Pack Release Notes

PGP Desktop Version 10.2 for Windows Maintenance Pack Release Notes PGP Desktop Version 10.2 for Windows Maintenance Pack Release Notes Thank you for using this Symantec Corporation product. These Release Notes contain important information regarding this release of PGP

More information

Symantec Patch Management Solution for Windows 8.5 powered by Altiris technology User Guide

Symantec Patch Management Solution for Windows 8.5 powered by Altiris technology User Guide Symantec Patch Management Solution for Windows 8.5 powered by Altiris technology User Guide Symantec Patch Management Solution for Windows 8.5 powered by Altiris technology User Guide Documentation version:

More information

Symantec Control Compliance Suite Express Security Content Update for JBoss Enterprise Application Platform 6.3. Release Notes

Symantec Control Compliance Suite Express Security Content Update for JBoss Enterprise Application Platform 6.3. Release Notes Symantec Control Compliance Suite Express Security Content Update for JBoss Enterprise Application Platform 6.3 Release Notes Express Security Content Update for JBoss Enterprise Application Platform 6.3

More information

Veritas CommandCentral Enterprise Reporter Administrator's Guide

Veritas CommandCentral Enterprise Reporter Administrator's Guide Veritas CommandCentral Enterprise Reporter Administrator's Guide for Microsoft Windows and Solaris 5.1 CommandCentral Enterprise Reporter Administrator's Guide The software described in this book is furnished

More information

Symantec NetBackup for DB2 Administrator's Guide

Symantec NetBackup for DB2 Administrator's Guide Symantec NetBackup for DB2 Administrator's Guide UNIX, Windows, and Linux Release 7.6 Symantec NetBackup for DB2 Administrator's Guide The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement

More information

Symantec ServiceDesk 7.1 SP2 Portal User Guide

Symantec ServiceDesk 7.1 SP2 Portal User Guide Symantec ServiceDesk 7.1 SP2 Portal User Guide Symantec ServiceDesk 7.1 SP2 Portal User Guide The software described in this book is furnished under a license agreement and may be used only in accordance

More information

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Quick Recovery Solutions Guide for Microsoft Exchange 2010

Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Quick Recovery Solutions Guide for Microsoft Exchange 2010 Veritas Storage Foundation and High Availability Solutions Quick Recovery Solutions Guide for Microsoft Exchange 2010 Windows Server 2008 5.1 Service Pack 2 Veritas Storage Foundation and HA Solutions

More information